Copy |
This category describes copy features. |
Basic Copying Method |
This section describes the basic procedure for copying. |
![]() |
![]() |
For details, see "Placing Originals."
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Canceling Copy Jobs |
This section describes how to cancel copy jobs. |
Canceling Scanning or Outgoing Jobs |
Canceling Reserved Jobs |
Canceling Scanning or Outgoing Jobs |
You can cancel scanning or outgoing jobs. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
The display will return to the standby mode. |
Canceling Reserved Jobs |
You can cancel a copy job while it is printing or waiting to be processed. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Selecting Paper Source |
You can manually specify a paper source (paper drawer (1 or 2) or stack bypass) by pressing |
Remark |
|
||||||
Copying on Papers in Drawers |
Using the Stack Bypass with Standard Paper Sizes |
Using the Stack Bypass with Irregular Sizes of Paper |
Using the Stack Bypass with Envelopes |
Copying on Papers in Drawers |
You need to set up the paper size and type for each paper source in advance. For details about configuring the paper size and type, see "Setting Paper Type and Size." |
![]() |
![]() |
For details, see "Placing Originals." |
![]() |
|
![]() |
The paper select indicator of the selected paper source lights. (See "Operation Panel.") |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press
|
Using the Stack Bypass with Standard Paper Sizes |
This section describes how to copy onto standard size paper using the stack bypass. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
![]() |
For details, see "Placing Originals." |
![]() |
|
![]() |
The paper select indicator of the selected paper source lights. (See "Operation Panel.") |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
To copy onto standard size paper, select the paper size from the followings: |
![]() |
![]() |
To copy onto standard size paper, select the paper type from the followings: |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press |
Using the Stack Bypass with Irregular Sizes of Paper |
This section describes how to copy onto nonstandard size paper using the stack bypass. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
![]() |
For details, see "Placing Originals." |
![]() |
|
![]() |
The paper select indicator of the selected paper source lights. (See "Operation Panel.") |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can also press [ |
![]() |
![]() |
To copy onto nonstandard size paper, select the paper type from the followings: |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press |
Using the Stack Bypass with Envelopes |
This section describes how to copy onto envelopes using the stack bypass. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
![]() |
For details, see "Placing Originals." |
![]() |
|
![]() |
The paper select indicator of the selected paper source lights. (See "Operation Panel.") |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
To copy onto envelopes, select the paper type from the followings: |
![]() |
If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press |
Selecting Image Quality (Copy) |
You can adjust the image quality of copies according to the types of originals. The default setting is <TEXT>. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
![]() |
For details, see "Placing Originals." |
![]() |
|
![]() |
<TEXT>: For text documents. <PHOTO>: For documents that contain fine text or photos. <TEXT/PHOTO>: For documents that contain text and photos.
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press |
Adjusting Density (Copy) |
You can adjust the density to the most appropriate level for the document either automatically or manually. |
Adjusting Automatically (Copy) |
Adjusting Manually (Copy) |
Adjusting Automatically (Copy) |
You can adjust the density to the most appropriate level for the document automatically. |
![]() |
![]() |
For details, see "Placing Originals." |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press |
Adjusting Manually (Copy) |
You can adjust the density to the most appropriate level for the document manually. |
![]() |
![]() |
For details, see "Placing Originals." |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
[ [ |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press |
Enlarge/Reduce Images |
You can convert a standard size original to a different standard size copy (preset zoom), or you can also enlarge or reduce images in 1% increments (custom copy ratio). The default setting is <100%>. |
Preset Zoom |
Custom Copy Ratio |
Preset Zoom |
You can enlarge or reduce from one standard paper size to another. |
![]() |
![]() |
For details, see "Placing Originals." |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press |
Custom Copy Ratio |
You can reduce or enlarge images by any copy ratio, in 1% increments. The available copy ratios are from 50% to 200%. |
![]() |
![]() |
For details, see "Placing Originals." |
![]() |
|
![]() |
You can use [
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press |
2-Sided Copying |
This mode enables you to make two-sided copies from one-sided or two-sided originals, or make one-sided copies from two-sided originals. This enables you to cut print costs in half when copying in large quantities. The default setting is <OFF>. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
1 to 2-Sided Copying |
2 to 2-Sided Copying |
2 to 1-Sided Copying |
1 to 2-Sided Copying |
You can make two-sided copies from one-sided originals. |
![]() |
![]() |
For details, see "Placing Originals." |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<BOOK TYPE>: The front and back sides of the copy will have the same top-bottom orientation. <CALENDAR TYPE>: The front and back sides of the copy will have opposite top-bottom orientations. For the landscape oriented documents, the front and back sides of the copy will have the opposite top-bottom orientation when <BOOK TYPE> is selected. When <CALENDAR TYPE> is selected, the front and back sides of the copy will have the same top-bottom orientation. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press
|
2 to 2-Sided Copying |
You can make two-sided copies from two-sided originals. |
![]() |
![]() |
For details, see "Placing Originals." |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<BOOK TYPE>: The front and back sides of the original have the same top-bottom orientation. <CALENDAR TYPE>: The front and back sides of the original have opposite top-bottom orientations. |
![]() |
![]() |
<BOOK TYPE>: The front and back sides of the copy will have the same top-bottom orientation. <CALENDAR TYPE>: The front and back sides of the copy will have opposite top-bottom orientations. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press
|
2 to 1-Sided Copying |
You can make one-sided copies from two-sided originals. |
![]() |
![]() |
For details, see "Placing Originals." |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<BOOK TYPE>: The front and back sides of the original have the same top-bottom orientation. <CALENDAR TYPE>: The front and back sides of the original have opposite top-bottom orientations. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press
|
Collating Copies |
You can copy originals collated into sets arranged in page order. This feature can be used together with both "2-Sided Copying" and "Multiple Originals onto One Sheet (2 on 1)." The default setting is <OFF>. |
![]() |
![]() |
For details, see "Placing Originals." |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
When the originals are loaded in the ADF, collate copying starts and no further operation is required. |
![]() |
Repeat this step to scan all pages. The machine prints only one copy of each page. |
![]() |
|
Multiple Originals onto One Sheet (2 on 1) |
2 on 1 mode automatically reduces two documents to fit on the selected paper size. This feature can be used together with both "Collating Copies" and "2-Sided Copying." The default setting is <OFF>. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
![]() |
For details, see "Placing Originals." |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press
|
Erasing Shadows/Lines |
This mode enables you to erase shadows and lines that appear when using various types of originals. The following three Frame Erase modes are available: Original Frame Erase, Book Frame Erase, and Binding Hole Erase. |
Remark |
|
||||||
Original Frame Erase |
Book Frame Erase |
Binding Hole Erase |
Original Frame Erase |
This mode erases the dark borders and frame lines that appear around the copy if the original is smaller than the selected paper size. You can also use this mode to create a blank border around the edge of the copy. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
![]() |
For details, see "Placing Originals." |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
The width ranges 1/16" to 1 15/16" (1 to 50 mm). |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press
|
Book Frame Erase |
This mode erases the dark borders and the center and contour lines that appear when you copy facing pages in a book or bound original onto a single sheet of paper. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
![]() |
For details, see "Placing Originals." |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
The width ranges 1/16" to 1 15/16" (1 to 50 mm). |
![]() |
![]() |
The width ranges 1/16" to 1 15/16" (1 to 50 mm). |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press
|
Binding Hole Erase |
This mode erases the shadows that appear on copies from binding holes on originals. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
![]() |
For details, see "Placing Originals." |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
The width ranges 3/16" to 13/16" (3 to 20 mm) |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press
The locations of the binding holes to be erased are shown in the illustration below. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
A: LEFT B: RIGHT C: TOP D: BOTTOM |
Adjusting Sharpness (Copy) |
You can set the sharpness of the copied image. The default setting is <5>. |
![]() |
![]() |
For details, see "Placing Originals." |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
The highest sharpness level is 9 and the lowest is 1. To copy text or lines clearly, select a high sharpness level. To copy originals containing printed images or other halftones, select a low sharpness level. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press |
Changing the Standard Mode |
The Standard mode is the combination of copy modes that the machine automatically applies when the power is turned ON, or when
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Initializing the Standard Mode |
This section describes how to initialize the current copy setting mode including standard mode. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Reserved Copy |
You can make copy settings and scan documents even if the machine is currently printing. The scanned documents are processed after the current job is complete. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
You can reserve up to 5 copy jobs, with different settings for each job. |
Fax |
This section describes the things that you must do before using fax functions. This section describes also the settings and procedures for sending and receiving fax documents, and for forwarding received fax documents. Fax functions are available only for the imageRUNNER 1025iF. |
Introduction to Using Fax Functions |
This section describes the things that you must do before using fax functions. Be sure to set the following items first:
Set the current time and date. (See "Set Date and Time.")
Register your machine's fax number. (See "Make Fax Settings (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only).")
Register your name or company name. (See "Make Fax Settings (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only)."
Set how the machine receives fax documents to suit your needs. (See "Methods for Receiving Faxes.")
Set the type of telephone line that is connected to the machine. (See "Make Fax Settings (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only).") |
Sending Faxes |
This section describes the settings and procedures for sending fax documents. |
Basic Methods for Sending Faxes |
Calling the Recipient before Sending Fax Documents (Manual Sending) |
Switching Temporarily to Tone Dialing (Fax) |
Dialing an Overseas Number (With Pauses) (Fax) |
Canceling Send Fax Documents |
Specifying Destinations (Fax) |
Sending Originals to More Than One Location (Broadcasting) (Fax) |
Selecting Image Quality (Fax) |
Adjusting Density (Fax) |
2-Sided Originals (Fax) |
Direct Sending (Fax) |
Job Recall (Fax) |
Favorites Buttons (Fax) |
Sending Originals at a Preset Time (Delayed Sending) (Fax) |
Standard Send Settings (Fax) |
Adjusting Sharpness (Fax) |
Setting the Type of Telephone Line (Fax) |
ECM Transmission (Fax) |
Adjusting the Pause Time (Fax) |
Redialing Automatically When the Line Is Busy (AUTO REDIAL) (Fax) |
Checking the Dial Line before Sending (Fax) |
Basic Methods for Sending Faxes |
This section describes the flow of sending faxes. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
The SEND indicator lights up and the machine enters the send standby mode. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you enter a wrong number when specifying a fax number, go back to the wrong digit with [ |
![]() |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ If you want to cancel sending, press You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 4.
|
Calling the Recipient before Sending Fax Documents (Manual Sending) |
Use manual sending when you want to talk to the recipient before sending a document, or if the recipient does not have a fax machine that can receive automatically. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
For information on how to connect an external telephone to the machine, see "Connect Telephone Cables." |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Switching Temporarily to Tone Dialing (Fax) |
If your machine is set for pulse dialing, use the procedure below to switch to tone dialing to use information services (e.g., banks, airline reservations, and hotel reservations). |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
If you are using the external telephone, hang up the handset after pressing |
Dialing an Overseas Number (With Pauses) (Fax) |
When you dial or register an overseas number, you may need to insert a pause within the number. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
For details on international access codes, contact your local telephone company. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
When you set the originals on the platen glass, press [ |
Canceling Send Fax Documents |
Follow this procedure to cancel a transmission in progress. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
Specifying Destinations (Fax) |
This section describes how to specify a fax destination. You can select a destination stored in the Address Book or a one-touch key, a coded dial code or specify a new destination. |
Using Numeric Keys (Fax) |
You can specify a new fax number using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you entered a wrong number when specifying a fax number, go back to the wrong digit with [
|
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 4.
|
Using the Address Book (Fax) |
The Address Book search enables you to search for a recipient registered in the machine. This is useful when you forget which one-touch key or coded dial code the recipient you want is registered under. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
If no recipient is registered in Address Book, <NOT REGISTERED> is displayed. |
![]() |
![]() |
<NAME SEARCH>: searches a destination by name <ADD/TEL SEARCH>: searches a destination by fax number |
![]() ![]() |
![]() |
For example, if you want to search for a name that starts with the letter "C", press [:a]: Letter mode [:1]: Number mode |
![]() |
![]() |
[ [ |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [
You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 7.
|
Using the One-Touch Keys (Fax) |
You can specify up to 23 destinations in the one-touch keys. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you pressed a wrong key, press |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [
You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 3.
|
Using Coded Dial Codes (Fax) |
You can specify up to 177 destinations using coded dial codes. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you entered a wrong code, press |
![]() |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [
You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 4.
|
Using the Group Addresses (Fax) |
Group Dialing enables you to specify a group of registered destinations in the one-touch keys or coded dial codes. This is useful if you want to send the same document to several destinations. You can specify up to 199 destinations in one group. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
Specifying a Group from the One-Touch Keys (Fax) |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you pressed a wrong key, press |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [
You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 4.
|
Specifying a Group from the Coded Dial Codes (Fax) |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you pressed a wrong key, press |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [
You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 4.
|
Sending Originals to More Than One Location (Broadcasting) (Fax) |
Broadcasting enables you to send the same document to multiple recipients. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you are specifying destinations registered in Address Book, you can skip this step. |
![]() |
![]() |
Use
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ |
Selecting Image Quality (Fax) |
You can adjust the image quality of the document you send. The higher image quality you set, the better the output will be, but the longer the transmission will take. The default setting is <FINE>. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you are specifying the destination registered in one-touch keys or coded dial codes, you can skip this step. |
![]() |
![]() |
For instructions on specifying destinations, see "Specifying Destinations (Fax)." |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can also press Fax: <FINE>, <PHOTO>, <SUPER FINE>, <ULTRA FINE>, <STANDARD> |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ |
Adjusting Density (Fax) |
You can adjust the density to the most appropriate level for the original. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you are specifying the destination registered in one-touch keys or coded dial codes, you can skip this step. |
![]() |
![]() |
For instructions on specifying destinations, see "Specifying Destinations (Fax)." |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
[ [ |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ |
2-Sided Originals (Fax) |
You can set the machine to automatically turn over two-sided originals that are placed in the ADF, and scan each side separately. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you are specifying the destination registered in one-touch keys or coded dial codes, you can skip this step. |
![]() |
![]() |
For instructions on specifying destinations, see "Specifying Destinations (Fax)." |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<BOOK TYPE>: The front and back sides of the document have the same top-bottom orientation. <CALENDAR TYPE>: The front and back sides of the document have opposite top-bottom orientations. |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ |
Direct Sending (Fax) |
With direct sending, the machine sends the document on the ADF as it scans one page, without storing all pages into memory at once. You can send a document ahead of other documents stored in memory. The default setting is <OFF>. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
To cancel direct sending, press |
![]() |
|
![]() |
If you select delayed transmission or sequential broadcasting, memory sending is automatically selected.
|
![]() |
Each page is sent as it is scanned.
|
Job Recall (Fax) |
You can recall the last three destinations, scan settings, and send settings which have been set, and then send your documents. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can change the recalled scan and send settings if necessary. |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ |
Favorites Buttons (Fax) |
You can register a destination together with any possible combination of send settings in a favorites button. One-touch keys 01 to 04 can be registered as favorites buttons. This feature is useful for registering frequently used send settings. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
Registering a Favorites Button (Fax) |
Erasing a Favorites Button (Fax) |
Using the Favorites Buttons (Fax) |
Registering a Favorites Button (Fax) |
This section describes the procedure for registering a favorites button. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If a one-touch destination is already registered in the desired one-touch key, select another key, or delete the destination first. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you do not want to set the optional settings, select <OFF>, then skip to step 20. If you want to set the options for sending faxes, select <ON>. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Erasing a Favorites Button (Fax) |
This section describes the procedure for erasing a favorites button. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Using the Favorites Buttons (Fax) |
If you frequently send documents with the same document settings to the same destination, store these settings in a favorites button. Then, when you need to specify the destination, all you have to do is select the favorites button containing your stored document settings and the desired destination, and send your document. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you pressed a wrong key, press |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [
|
Sending Originals at a Preset Time (Delayed Sending) (Fax) |
Delayed sending enables you to start transmission at a specified time. You can store up to 64 delayed sending jobs. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you are specifying destinations registered in Address Book, you can skip this step. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
The document is scanned and stored into memory. It will be sent to the specified destination at the specified time. If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [
|
Standard Send Settings (Fax) |
This mode enables you to change the standard settings for the Send function, including the scan mode. |
Storing the Standard Send Settings (Fax) |
Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default (Fax) |
Storing the Standard Send Settings (Fax) |
You can change and store the Standard Send Settings. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can specify the following settings:
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default (Fax) |
You can restore the Standard Send Settings to their default settings. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
To cancel restoring the Standard Send Settings, press [ |
![]() |
|
Adjusting Sharpness (Fax) |
This mode enables you to scan original images with a sharper or softer contrast. To scan originals with text or lines with a sharper contrast, increase the sharpness as setting. To scan originals containing printed images or other halftones with a softer contrast, decrease the sharpness as setting. The default setting is <4> (middle).
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
Each time you press [ |
![]() |
|
Setting the Type of Telephone Line (Fax) |
This setting enables you to set the machine to match the telephone dialing system your telephone line uses: touch-tone or rotary pulse. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<TOUCH TONE>: Tone dialing (default) <ROTARY PULSE>: Pulse dialing Be sure to check the type of telephone line you are using and make the correct setting. If this setting is incorrect, you will not be able to communicate with other machines. |
![]() |
|
ECM Transmission (Fax) |
ECM (Error Correction Mode) reduces the effect of system and line errors on documents that occur during sending or receiving with another fax machine that supports ECM. If the other machine does not support ECM, this setting is ignored. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: The ECM transmission is not activated. <ON>: The ECM transmission is activated. |
![]() |
|
Adjusting the Pause Time (Fax) |
Some overseas dialing may be affected by the distance or complex routing of connections when dialing the international access code, country code, and the destination's telephone number all at once. In such cases, insert a pause after the international access code. When the machine dials the number, it will pause where the pause was inserted in the number. This helps to improve the connection. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
For details on international access codes, contact your local telephone company. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ |
Redialing Automatically When the Line Is Busy (AUTO REDIAL) (Fax) |
Automatic redialing enables the machine to automatically redial the recipient's fax number if the recipient cannot be reached due to a busy line, or if a sending error occurs. Auto Redial can be turned <ON> or <OFF>. If you set <AUTO REDIAL> to <ON>, you can set how many times the machine redials the number, and the redial interval. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<ON>: Resends all pages if an error occurs during transmission. <OFF>: Does not redial even if an error occurs during transmission. |
![]() |
|
Checking the Dial Line before Sending (Fax) |
The following redirection problem may happen with certain kinds of fax machines on the market made by companies other than Canon. The Check Dial Line Before Sending mode prevents this rare occurrence from happening. If you are sending a fax document from your machine at the same time another fax machine (made by a company other than Canon) is trying to send you a fax, your fax document may end up being redirected to that fax machine, instead of the original destination you had intended. Setting <DIALING LINE CHCK> to <ON> enables you to avoid such sending problems. The default setting is <OFF>. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Receiving Faxes |
This section describes the settings and procedures for receiving fax documents. |
Methods for Receiving Faxes |
Selecting the Receive Mode (Fax) |
Basic Methods for Receiving Faxes |
Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Paper (Fax) |
Reducing a Received Document (Fax) |
Specifying Printing When Toner Runs Out (Fax) |
ECM Reception (Fax) |
Adjusting the Auto Switch Time (Fax) |
Setting the Incoming Ring (Fax) |
Receiving Documents Manually with an Extension Telephone (REMOTE RX) (Fax) |
Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out (MEMORY LOCK) (Fax) |
Printing All Documents Stored in the Memory Lock Reception Mode (Fax) |
Methods for Receiving Faxes |
Your machine offers several methods for receiving fax documents. You can receive documents automatically or manually. Follow the chart below to choose the best fax receive mode for your needs. |
FaxOnly |
In this mode the machine will receive documents automatically. Use this mode for a fax on a dedicated telephone line that you do not need for telephone voice communication.
All you have to do is set <RX MODE> to <FaxOnly>.
The machine will receive fax documents automatically. For telephone calls, you cannot talk to the caller in this mode; the caller will hear a slow beep tone. |
Remark |
|
||||||
FaxTel |
In this mode the machine will receive documents automatically for fax calls and ring for telephone calls.
Be sure to do the following:
Incoming calls will be handled in the following ways:
|
Manual |
When you select <Manual> in <RX MODE>, follow the procedure below to receive a fax.
Be sure to do the following:
|
AnsMode |
In this mode the machine will receive documents automatically for fax calls and your answering machine will record a message for telephone calls.
Be sure to do the following:
|
Remark |
|
||||||
DRPD |
DRPD (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection) service assigns two or more telephone numbers with distinctive ring patterns to a single telephone line, allowing you to have both a fax number(s) and a telephone number(s) using only one telephone line. Your fax will automatically monitor incoming calls and based on the ring pattern, will let you know if the call is a fax or voice call. Set the fax ring pattern that matches the pattern assigned by your telephone company. Contact your telephone company for availability.
Be sure to do the following:
|
Selecting the Receive Mode (Fax) |
You can set the fax receive mode to suit your needs. The default setting is <FaxOnly>. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<FaxOnly>: Answers all calls as faxes. <FaxTel>: Switches between fax and voice calls automatically. For optional settings, see "TX/RX SETTINGS (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only)." <AnsMode>: Receives faxes automatically and records voice messages. <DRPD> (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection): Distinguishes between fax and voice calls using distinctive ring patterns. Select the ring pattern assigned by your telephone company. For optional settings, see "TX/RX SETTINGS (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only)." <Manual>: Does not answer any calls. You have to manually receive faxes.
|
![]() |
|
Basic Methods for Receiving Faxes |
This section describes how the machine operates when it receives fax documents. |
|
|
The Processing/Data indicator goes out when documents stored in memory are printed.
|
Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Paper (Fax) |
You can print received documents on both sides of the paper you select. This enables you to save paper. The default setting is <OFF>. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Reducing a Received Document (Fax) |
You can set whether the received images print out at a reduced size. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you select <AUTO>, the image is reduced automatically. Skip to step 10. If you select <FIXED REDUCTION>, go to step 9. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<VERTICAL ONLY>: Reduces the document vertically only. <HORIZ & VERTICAL>: Reduces the document both horizontally and vertically. |
![]() |
|
Specifying Printing When Toner Runs Out (Fax) |
You can set if the machine stores all documents in memory or continue printing without storing documents in memory, when the toner runs out. The default setting is <RX TO MEMORY>. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<RX TO MEMORY>: The machine stores all documents in memory. <KEEP PRINTING>: You can continue printing. |
![]() |
|
ECM Reception (Fax) |
ECM (Error Correction Mode) reduces the effect of system and line errors on documents that occur during sending or receiving with another fax machine that supports ECM. If the other machine does not support ECM, this setting is ignored. If reception speed appears to be extremely slow, you may be able to speed up reception time by turning ECM off. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: The ECM reception is not activated. <ON>: The ECM reception is activated. |
![]() |
|
Adjusting the Auto Switch Time (Fax) |
This function enables you to set the machine to switch to document receive mode after ringing for a specified length of time in the <Manual> mode. The default setting is <OFF>. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the machine receives a fax, the machine does not ring and switches to the receive mode automatically. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the machine receives a fax, the machine does not ring and switches to the receive mode automatically.
|
![]() |
|
Setting the Incoming Ring (Fax) |
This function enables you to activate the ring alert of the external telephone if <RX MODE> is set to <FaxOnly> or <FaxTel>. Selecting <ON> in <INCOMING RING> enables you to distinguish between the fax reception and answer voice calls when you pick up the external telephone while it is ringing. The default setting is <OFF>. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Receiving Documents Manually with an Extension Telephone (REMOTE RX) (Fax) |
Remote reception enables you to use an external telephone connected to the machine to receive faxes manually. This can be useful when the machine is not nearby or is being used by someone else. The default setting is <ON>, and the default remote reception ID is <25>. |
Activating Remote Receive Mode (Fax) |
This section describes how to activate the remote receive mode. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you do not want to change the default remote reception ID, skip to step 9. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Receiving Documents with the Remote Reception (Fax) |
This section describes how to receive documents with the remote reception. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
If the machine is set for pulse dialing, press |
![]() |
|
Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out (MEMORY LOCK) (Fax) |
The machine automatically receives faxes in memory when printing is disabled under certain conditions (e.g., toner or paper has run out). You can also set the machine to store all documents in memory without automatically printing them. Locking the machine to receive and store all documents in memory is called memory lock reception. The default setting is <OFF>. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the memory lock password has already been set, enter the password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: Does not print an RX report. <ON>: Prints an RX report.
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you do not need to set the timer for memory lock, skip to step 16. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Printing All Documents Stored in the Memory Lock Reception Mode (Fax) |
Follow this procedure to print documents received when the machine is in the memory lock reception mode. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
The received documents are printed. |
![]() |
|
Forwarding Received Fax Documents |
You can set the machine to forward received fax documents to other machines or file servers. If a received document matches the forwarding conditions, it is forwarded to the specified destination. Forwarding settings can be made using the Remote UI. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
Specifying Forwarding Settings (Fax) |
Sending Documents in Memory to a Different Destination (Fax) |
Resending Documents with Forwarding Errors (Fax) |
Checking/Changing the Status of Documents with Forwarding Errors (Fax) |
Specifying Forwarding Settings (Fax) |
This section describes how to register, erase, print, check, and change the forwarding settings. |
Storing Forwarding Settings (Fax) |
The Remote UI enables you to automatically forward received fax documents to specified addresses. To use this function, you need to specify the forwarding settings in two ways, and depending on the settings the function will work differently:
The machine will forward only documents that meet specified conditions.
The machine will forward all received documents. |
Remark |
|
||||||
|
If you select [All], all the forwarding settings stored in the machine are displayed. |
Erasing Forwarding Settings (Fax) |
You can erase forwarding settings that have been stored. |
|
|
Printing Forwarding Settings (Fax) |
You can print a list of the stored forwarding settings. |
|
|
Checking/Changing Forwarding Settings (Fax) |
You can check or change forwarding settings that have been stored. |
|
|
|
Sending Documents in Memory to a Different Destination (Fax) |
You can transfer the fax documents received in memory to the specified destination. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
The machine starts to send the selected document.
|
Resending Documents with Forwarding Errors (Fax) |
You can resend the fax documents that the machine failed to forward. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Checking/Changing the Status of Documents with Forwarding Errors (Fax) |
You can check the status of fax documents that the machine failed to forward. You can also erase and print those documents. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
To cancel erasing the job, select <No>.
|
![]() |
To cancel printing the job, select <No>.
|
![]() |
|
Checking/Changing the Status of Fax Documents in Memory |
System monitor enables you to view the transmission and reception results, and monitor the status of the send and receive jobs currently being processed. |
Remark |
|
||||||
Checking/Deleting Fax Transmission Documents |
Checking/Deleting Fax Reception Documents |
Printing the Fax Log |
Checking/Deleting Fax Transmission Documents |
You can check the status of fax documents currently being sent or waiting to be sent, then delete unwanted documents as necessary. |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Checking/Deleting Fax Reception Documents |
You can check the status of fax documents currently being received, then delete unwanted documents as necessary. |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you select a document with the message <RX TRM...>, skip to step 5. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you do not want to cancel the job, press [ |
![]() |
|
Printing the Fax Log |
You can print the results of fax transactions (transmission or reception). TX REPORT, RX REPORT, and ACTIVITY REPORT can be set to print automatically. You can also print ACTIVITY REPORT manually. |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<PRINT ERROR ONLY>: Prints a report only when a transmission error occurs. <OUTPUT YES>: Prints a report every time you send a document. <OUTPUT NO>: Does not print a report. Skip to step 7. |
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: Does not print the first page. <ON>: Prints the first page. |
![]() |
The following items are displayed in the Transmission Report:
|
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OUTPUT NO>: Does not print a report. <PRINT ERROR ONLY>: Prints a report only when a reception error occurs. <OUTPUT YES>: Prints a report every time you receive a document. |
![]() |
The following items are displayed in the Reception Report:
|
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OUTPUT YES>: Prints a report after every 40 transactions. <OUTPUT NO>: Does not print a report. Skip to step 9. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: Prints a report with the transmission and reception results listed chronologically. <ON>: Prints a report with the transmission and reception results separated in a report. |
![]() |
The following items are displayed in the Activity Report:
If you set <LIST PRINT> to <ACTIVITY REPORT> in <REPORT SETTINGS>, you can print the transaction report (last 40 transactions maximum) manually. |
I-Fax |
This section describes the things that you must do before using I-fax functions. This section describes also the settings and procedures for sending and receiving I-fax documents, and for forwarding received I-fax documents. I-fax functions are available only for the imageRUNNER 1025iF. |
Introduction to Using I-Fax Functions |
Internet faxing (I-fax) enables you to send and receive fax documents over the network. Scanned documents are converted to TIFF format and are transmitted as an attachment file of an e-mail message to the recipient I-fax compatible machine. For I-fax functions, instead of specifying the recipient fax number, you enter the e-mail address. This section describes the things that you must do before using I-fax functions. Be sure to set the following items first:
Register your name or company name. (See "Make Fax Settings (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only).")
Set the current time and date. (See "Set Date and Time.")
Set the network settings to enable your machine to communicate over the network. (See "Basic Network Settings.")
Set the e-mail settings to enable your machine to communicate with a mail server. (See "Setting Scan to E-Mail and I-Fax.") |
Remark |
|
||||||
Sending I-Faxes |
This section describes the settings and procedures for sending I-fax documents. |
Basic Methods for Sending I-Faxes |
Canceling Send I-Fax Documents |
Specifying Destinations (I-Fax) |
Sending Originals to More Than One Location (Broadcasting) (I-Fax) |
Selecting Image Quality (I-Fax) |
Adjusting Density (I-Fax) |
2-Sided Originals (I-Fax) |
Job Recall (I-Fax) |
Favorites Buttons (I-Fax) |
Sending Originals at a Preset Time (Delayed Sending) (I-Fax) |
Resending Data Automatically When an Error Occurs (RETRY TIMES) (I-Fax) |
Standard Send Settings (I-Fax) |
Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default (I-Fax) |
Send Settings (I-Fax) |
Naming a Sent Document Using an I-Fax |
Subject/Message (I-Fax) |
Reply-to (I-Fax) |
Adjusting Sharpness (I-Fax) |
Specifying the Maximum Data Size for Sending I-Faxes |
Dividing the Data for Sending I-Faxes |
Basic Methods for Sending I-Faxes |
This section describes the flow of sending I-faxes. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
The SEND indicator lights up and the machine enters the send standby mode. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you enter a wrong character when specifying an I-fax address, go back to the wrong character with [ If you want to start sending without adjusting the optional send settings, skip to step 9. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: Sends multiple images as a single file without dividing them. <ON>: Separates multiple images and send them as separate files. |
![]() |
![]() |
I-Fax: <200x200dpi>, <200x100dpi> |
![]() |
![]() |
<TEXT/PHOTO>, <TEXT>, <PHOTO> |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 4.
|
Canceling Send I-Fax Documents |
This section describes how to specify an I-fax address. You can select a destination stored in the Address Book, a one-touch key, or a coded dial code, or specify a new address. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
Specifying Destinations (I-Fax) |
This section describes how to specify an I-fax address. You can select a destination stored in the Address Book or a one-touch key, or specify a new address. |
Using Numeric Keys (I-Fax) |
You can specify a new I-fax address. Regardless of the distance and area, I-fax helps you to reduce transmission costs by making transactions via the Internet. You can also specify the scan settings and the settings at the destination when using I-fax. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you entered a wrong character when specifying an I-fax address, press [ If you want to start sending without adjusting the optional send settings, skip to step 6. |
![]() |
You can enter the optional settings. (See "Send Settings (I-Fax).") |
![]() |
f the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 4.
|
Using the Address Book (I-Fax) |
The Address Book search enables you to search for a recipient registered in the machine. This is useful when you forget which one-touch key or coded dial code the recipient you want is registered under. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
If no recipient is registered in Address Book, <NOT REGISTERED> is displayed. |
![]() |
![]() |
<NAME SEARCH>: searches a destination by name <ADD/TEL SEARCH>: searches a destination by address |
![]() |
![]() |
For example, if you want to search for a name that starts with the letter "C", press [ [:A]: Letter mode [:1]: Number mode |
![]() |
![]() |
[ [ |
![]() |
![]() |
You can enter the optional settings by pressing [OK] again. (See "Send Settings (I-Fax).") |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 7.
|
Using the One-Touch Keys (I-Fax) |
You can specify up to 23 destinations using one-touch keys. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you pressed a wrong key, press If you want to start sending without adjusting the optional send settings, skip to step 5. |
![]() |
You can enter the optional settings. (See "Send Settings (I-Fax).") |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 3.
|
Using Coded Dial Codes (I-Fax) |
You can specify up to 177 destinations using coded dial codes. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you entered a wrong code, press If you want to start sending without adjusting the optional send settings, skip to step 6. |
![]() |
You can enter the optional settings. (See "Send Settings (I-Fax).") |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 4.
|
Using the Group Addresses (I-Fax) |
Group Dialing enables you to specify a group of registered destinations in the one-touch keys or coded dial codes. This is useful if you want to send the same document to several destinations. You can specify up to 199 destinations in one group. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
Specifying a Group from the One-Touch Keys (I-Fax) |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you pressed a wrong key or code, press If you want to start sending without adjusting the optional send settings, skip to step 5. |
![]() |
You can enter the optional settings. (See "Send Settings (I-Fax).") |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 3.
|
Specifying a Group from the Coded Dial Codes (I-Fax) |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you pressed a wrong key or code, press If you want to start sending without adjusting the optional send settings, skip to step 5. |
![]() |
You can enter the optional settings. (See "Send Settings (I-Fax).") |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 3.
|
Sending Originals to More Than One Location (Broadcasting) (I-Fax) |
Broadcasting enables you to send the same document to multiple recipients. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you are specifying destinations registered in Address Book, you can skip this step. |
![]() |
![]() |
Use
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ |
Selecting Image Quality (I-Fax) |
You can adjust the image quality of the document you send. The higher image quality you set, the better the output will be, but the longer the transmission will take. The default setting is <200X200 dpi>. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you are specifying the destination registered in one-touch keys or coded dial codes, you can skip this step. |
![]() |
![]() |
For instructions on specifying destinations, see "Specifying Destinations (I-Fax)." |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can also press I-Fax: <200x200dpi>, <200x100dpi> |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ |
Adjusting Density (I-Fax) |
You can adjust the density to the most appropriate level for the original. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you are specifying the destination registered in one-touch keys or coded dial codes, you can skip this step. |
![]() |
![]() |
For instructions on specifying destinations, see "Specifying Destinations (I-Fax)." |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
[ [ |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ |
2-Sided Originals (I-Fax) |
You can set the machine to automatically turn over two-sided originals that are placed in the ADF, and scan each side separately. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you are specifying the destination registered in one-touch keys or coded dial codes, you can skip this step. |
![]() |
![]() |
For instructions on specifying destinations, see "Specifying Destinations (I-Fax)." |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<BOOK TYPE>: The front and back sides of the document have the same top-bottom orientation. <CALENDAR TYPE>: The front and back sides of the document have opposite top-bottom orientations. |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ |
Job Recall (I-Fax) |
You can recall the last three addresses, scan settings, and send settings which have been set, and then send your documents. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can change the recalled scan and send settings if necessary. |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ |
Favorites Buttons (I-Fax) |
You can register a destination together with any possible combination of send settings in a favorites button. One-touch keys 01 to 04 can be registered as favorites buttons. This feature is useful for registering frequently used send settings. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
Registering a Favorites Button (I-Fax) |
Erasing a Favorites Button (I-Fax) |
Using the Favorites Buttons (I-Fax) |
Registering a Favorites Button (I-Fax) |
This section describes the procedure for registering a favorites button. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If a one-touch destination is already registered in the desired one-touch key, select another key, or delete the destination first. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: Sends multiple images as a single file without dividing them. <ON>: Separates multiple images and send them as separate files. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can select from <200 x 200dpi>, <200 x 400dpi>, <300 x 300dpi>, <400 x 400dpi>, <600 x 600dpi>, <100 x 100dpi>, <150 x 150dpi>, and <200 x 100dpi>.
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Erasing a Favorites Button (I-Fax) |
This section describes the procedure for erasing a favorites button. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Using the Favorites Buttons (I-Fax) |
If you frequently send documents with the same document settings to the same destination, store these settings in a favorites button. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you pressed a wrong key, press If you want to start sending without adjusting the optional send settings, skip to step 5. |
![]() |
You can enter the optional settings. (See "Send Settings (I-Fax).") |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 3.
|
Sending Originals at a Preset Time (Delayed Sending) (I-Fax) |
Delayed sending enables you to start transmission at a specified time. You can store up to 64 delayed sending jobs. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you are specifying destinations registered in Address Book, you can skip this step. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
The document is scanned and stored into memory. It will be sent to the specified destination at the specified time. If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [
|
Resending Data Automatically When an Error Occurs (RETRY TIMES) (I-Fax) |
Retry Times is the mode which automatically resends data when the data cannot be sent. This occurs because the receiver is busy sending or receiving, or when an error occurs. This setting determines the number of retry attempts. You can set from one to five retry attempts, or select <0> to turn the Retry Times mode off. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Standard Send Settings (I-Fax) |
This mode enables you to change the standard settings for the Send function, including the scan mode and file format. |
Storing the Standard Send Settings (I-Fax) |
Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default (I-Fax) |
Storing the Standard Send Settings (I-Fax) |
You can change and store the Standard Send Settings. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can specify the following settings:
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default (I-Fax) |
You can restore the Standard Send Settings to their default settings. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
To cancel restoring the Standard Send Settings, press [ |
![]() |
|
Send Settings (I-Fax) |
You can optionally set, if multiple images are sent as separate files or a single file, resolution, and original type after specifying the I-fax address. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you are specifying the destination registered in one-touch keys or coded dial codes, you can skip this step. |
![]() |
![]() |
For details, see "Specifying Destinations (I-Fax)." |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: Sends multiple images as a single file without dividing them. <ON>: Separates multiple images and send them as separate files. |
![]() |
![]() |
I-Fax: <200x200dpi>, <200x100dpi> |
![]() |
![]() |
<TEXT/PHOTO>, <TEXT>, <PHOTO> |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [
|
Naming a Sent Document Using an I-Fax |
You can scan an original, and send it to a destination via the Internet as an I-fax. An I-fax can only be sent to machines that can receive faxes through the Internet. You can enter the document's name. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Subject/Message (I-Fax) |
You can scan an original, and send it to a destination via the Internet as an I-fax. An I-fax can only be sent to machines that can receive faxes through the Internet. You can enter a subject line, message body text. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Reply-to (I-Fax) |
You can scan an original, and send it to a destination via the Internet as an I-fax. An I-fax can only be sent to machines that can receive faxes through the Internet. You can enter reply-to address. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Adjusting Sharpness (I-Fax) |
This mode enables you to scan original images with a sharper or softer contrast. To scan originals with text or lines with a sharper contrast, increase the sharpness as setting. To scan originals containing printed images or other halftones with a softer contrast, decrease the sharpness as setting. The default setting is <4> (middle).
If you scan an original containing halftones, such as a printed image, using the Photo mode, the moiré effect (a shimmering, wavy pattern) may occur. In this case, you can lessen this moiré effect by decreasing the sharpness to produce a clearer image.
You can enhance the edges of original images so that faint or fine text is scanned with a sharper contrast by increasing the sharpness. This setting is particularly suited for scanning blueprints and faint pencil drawn images. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
Each time you press [ |
![]() |
|
Specifying the Maximum Data Size for Sending I-Faxes |
This function enables you to set the maximum data size for outgoing I-fax documents. If an I-fax transmission exceeds the data size limit, it is handled as an error and is not sent. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Dividing the Data for Sending I-Faxes |
This function enables you to divide an I-fax document into separate files when it is sent if its size exceeds the data size you specify in "Specifying the Maximum Data Size for Sending I-Faxes." |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Receiving I-Faxes |
This section describes the settings and procedures for receiving I-fax documents. |
Basic Methods for Receiving I-Faxes |
Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Paper (I-Fax) |
Reducing a Received Document (I-Fax) |
Specifying Printing When Toner Runs Out (I-Fax) |
Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out (MEMORY LOCK) (I-Fax) |
Printing All Documents Stored in the Memory Lock Reception Mode (I-Fax) |
Basic Methods for Receiving I-Faxes |
This section describes how the machine operates when it receives I-Fax documents. |
|
|
The Processing/Data indicator goes out when documents stored in memory are printed.
|
Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Paper (I-Fax) |
You can print received documents on both sides of the paper you select. This enables you to save paper. The default setting is <OFF>. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Reducing a Received Document (I-Fax) |
You can set whether the received images print out at a reduced size. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you select <AUTO>, the image is reduced automatically. Skip to step 10. If you select <FIXED REDUCTION>, go to step 9. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<VERTICAL ONLY>: Reduces the document vertically only. <HORIZ & VERTICAL>: Reduces the document both horizontally and vertically. |
![]() |
|
Specifying Printing When Toner Runs Out (I-Fax) |
You can set if the machine stores all documents in memory or continue printing without storing documents in memory, when the toner runs out. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<RX TO MEMORY>: The machine stores all documents in memory. <KEEP PRINTING>: You can continue printing. |
![]() |
|
Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out (MEMORY LOCK) (I-Fax) |
The machine automatically receives I-Faxes in memory when printing is disabled under certain conditions (e.g., toner or paper has run out). You can also set the machine to store all documents in memory without automatically printing them. Locking the machine to receive and store all documents in memory is called memory lock reception. The default setting is <OFF>. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the memory lock password has already been set, enter the password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: Does not print an RX report. <ON>: Prints an RX report.
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you do not need to set the timer for memory lock, skip to step 16. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Printing All Documents Stored in the Memory Lock Reception Mode (I-Fax) |
Follow this procedure to print documents received when the machine is in the memory lock reception mode. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
The received documents are printed. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Forwarding Received I-Fax Documents |
You can set the machine to forward received I-fax documents to other machines or file servers. If a received document matches the forwarding conditions, it is forwarded to the specified destination. Forwarding settings can be made using the Remote UI. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
Specifying Forwarding Settings (I-Fax) |
Resending Documents with Forwarding Errors (I-Fax) |
Checking/Changing the Status of Documents with Forwarding Errors (I-Fax) |
Specifying Forwarding Settings (I-Fax) |
This section describes how to register, erase, print, check, and change the forwarding settings. |
Storing Forwarding Settings (I-Fax) |
The Remote UI enables you to automatically forward received I-fax documents to specified addresses. To use this function, you need to specify the forwarding settings in two ways, and depending on the settings the function will work differently:
The machine will forward only documents that meet specified conditions.
The machine will forward all received documents. |
Remark |
|
||||||
|
If you select [All], all the forwarding settings stored in the machine are displayed. |
Erasing Forwarding Settings (I-Fax) |
You can erase forwarding settings that have been stored. |
|
|
Printing Forwarding Settings (I-Fax) |
You can print a list of the stored forwarding settings. |
|
|
Checking/Changing Forwarding Settings (I-Fax) |
You can check or change forwarding settings that have been stored. |
|
|
|
Resending Documents with Forwarding Errors (I-Fax) |
You can resend the I-fax documents that the machine failed to forward. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Checking/Changing the Status of Documents with Forwarding Errors (I-Fax) |
You can check the status of I-fax documents that the machine failed to forward. You can also erase and print those documents. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
To cancel erasing the job, select <No>.
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
To cancel printing the job, select <No>.
|
![]() |
|
Checking/Changing the Status of I-Fax Documents in Memory |
The System Monitor enables you to view the transmission and reception results, and monitor the status of the send and receive jobs currently being processed. |
Remark |
|
||||||
Checking Arrival of I-Fax |
Checking/Deleting I-Fax Transmission Documents |
Checking/Deleting I-Fax Reception Documents |
Printing the I-Fax Log |
Checking Arrival of I-Fax |
The machine regularly checks for the arrival of I-faxes. However, you can check for the arrival of I-faxes at any time using the System Monitor key. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
The machine starts checking the arrival of I-faxes and receives them. |
Checking/Deleting I-Fax Transmission Documents |
You can check the status of I-Fax documents currently being sent or waiting to be sent, and delete unwanted documents as necessary. |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Checking/Deleting I-Fax Reception Documents |
You can check the status of I-fax documents currently being received, then delete unwanted documents as necessary. |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you select a document with the message <RX TRM...>, skip to step 5. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you do not want to cancel the job, press [ |
![]() |
|
Printing the I-Fax Log |
You can print the results of fax transactions (transmission or reception). TX REPORT, RX REPORT, and ACTIVITY REPORT can be set to print automatically. You can also print ACTIVITY REPORT manually. |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<PRINT ERROR ONLY>: Prints a report only when a transmission error occurs. <OUTPUT YES>: Prints a report every time you send a document. <OUTPUT NO>: Does not print a report. Skip to step 7. |
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: Does not print the first page. <ON>: Prints the first page. |
![]() |
The following items are displayed in the Transmission Report:
|
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OUTPUT NO>: Does not print a report. <PRINT ERROR ONLY>: Prints a report only when a reception error occurs. <OUTPUT YES>: Prints a report every time you receive a document. |
![]() |
The following items are displayed in the Reception Report:
|
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OUTPUT YES>: Prints a report after every 40 transactions. <OUTPUT NO>: Does not print a report. Skip to step 9. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: Prints a report with the transmission and reception results listed chronologically. <ON>: Prints a report with the transmission and reception results separated in a report. |
![]() |
The following items are displayed in the Activity Report:
If you set <LIST PRINT> to <ACTIVITY REPORT> in <REPORT SETTINGS>, you can print the transaction report (last 40 transactions maximum) manually. |
PC Fax |
This category describes how to send documents created using application software from your computer. |
System Requirements (PC Faxing) |
The fax driver can be used in the following system environments:
Any computer which runs the above operating system software properly. However, at least one of the following output ports is required:
|
Remark |
|
||||||
Where to Find Help (PC Faxing) |
Here is where to get immediate help if you are having problems installing or using the fax driver. |
Any hints, enhancements, limitations, and restrictions you need to be aware of when installing and using your fax driver are included in the README.TXT file provided with the driver. This file is located in the [DRIVERS] folder.
You can locate additional help for questions you may have regarding your fax in the Online Help file provided with the driver. In the fax properties dialog box, you can click [Help] to display additional information about every feature and option in the fax driver.
If the Online Help file does not provide the information you need, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or service provider. |
Faxing Fundamentals |
This section explains the fundamental operations of the fax driver, such as how to display the fax driver, and how to send a fax from a computer. |
Faxing a Document |
Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand |
Setting Up the Fax Configuration |
Viewing the Online Help (PC Faxing) |
Faxing a Document |
The procedure for faxing a document created in application software is as follows. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
|
The [Print] dialog box is displayed.
|
The fax driver screen is displayed.
|
The [Print] dialog box is displayed. |
The [Fax Sending Settings] dialog box is displayed. |
|
|
Faxing begins. |
Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand |
To specify the default settings for faxing documents, follow the procedure below. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
The [Printers] folder is displayed.
|
The fax driver screen is displayed. The fax driver screen includes the following sheets.
|
For details about the fax driver settings, click [Help] in the bottom right-hand corner of the fax driver window to view the online help. |
|
Setting Up the Fax Configuration |
To configure the fax conditions, follow the procedure below. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
The [Printers] folder is displayed.
|
The printer properties dialog box is displayed. |
|
|
Viewing the Online Help (PC Faxing) |
To view the online help, follow the procedure below. |
Remark |
|
||||||
See "Faxing a Document" or "Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand" on how to display the fax driver screen. |
The online help is displayed. |
Useful Fax Functions |
This section explains useful functions for sending faxes, such as scheduling the fax send time, attaching a cover sheet, etc. |
Setting the Fax Send Time |
Attaching a Cover Sheet |
Setting the Fax Send Time |
You can store the data temporarily in the printer, and send the fax at the specifyed time. |
Remark |
|
||||||
See "Faxing a Document" on how to display the fax driver screen. |
|
Specify a time from 0:00 to 23:59. |
The data is stored temporarily in the printer, and the fax is sent at the specified time. |
Attaching a Cover Sheet |
To attach a cover sheet to the fax, follow the procedure below. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
See "Faxing a Document" on how to display the fax driver screen. |
Select one of the following options:
|
|
If you do not specify the items to include on the cover sheet, proceed to step 12. The [Item Settings] dialog box is displayed. |
You can specify the following items:
|
You can specify the following items:
|
|
|
|
|
The [Fax Sending Settings] dialog box is displayed. |
|
|
|
The specified cover sheet is attached to the fax when the fax is sent. |
Using the Address Book |
This section explains how to use the address book, and includes the procedures for registering individual and group addresses, editing the address book, etc. You can also specify destinations from address books created in applications other than the fax driver. |
Remark |
|
||||||
Single Person Entry |
Group Entry |
Importing Address Book Entries |
Exporting Address Book Entries |
Changing the Address Book Export Destination |
Single Person Entry |
You can register addresses for individual people in the address book. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
See "Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand" on how to display the [Edit Address Book] sheet. |
The [Add Person] dialog box is displayed. |
|
|
|
The settings are registered.
|
Group Entry |
You can register groups in the address book. As well as the addresses of individual people in a group, you can also register other registered groups as sub-groups. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
See "Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand" on how to display the [Edit Address Book] sheet. |
The [Add Group] dialog box is displayed. |
Select what to register from among the following:
|
To remove a member of the selected group, select the person or group entry you want to remove from the [Current Group Members] list → click [Delete].
|
|
The settings are registered. |
Importing Address Book Entries |
You can load data from CSV (*.csv) files or Canon Address Book files (*.abk) into the address book. If you load CSV format data, specify the character to be used as a separator. |
Remark |
|
||||||
See "Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand" on how to display the [Edit Address Book] sheet. |
The [Open] dialog box is displayed. |
Select the type of the file to import from [Files of type]: CSV Files (*.csv), Canon Address Book(*.abk), All Files(*.*) The address book is imported, and added to the list. |
Exporting Address Book Entries |
You can save data registered in the address book as a CSV (*.csv) file or a Canon Address Book file (*.abk). If you save it in CSV format, specify the character to be used as a separator. |
Remark |
|
||||||
See "Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand" on how to display the [Edit Address Book] sheet. |
The [Save As] dialog box is displayed. |
Select the type of the file to export from [Save as type]: CSV Files (*.csv) or Canon Address Book(*.abk) The specified address book is saved as a file. |
Changing the Address Book Export Destination |
You can change the save destination of the address book of the fax driver (the Canon Fax Driver Address Book), or create a new address book. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
See "Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand" on how to display the [Edit Address Book] sheet. |
The [Browse for Folder] dialog box is displayed. |
|
|
Printing from a Computer |
This category describes how to print from computers. |
Introduction to Using Print Functions |
The Canon PCL5c, PCL5e, PCL6, and UFRII LT printer drivers enable users of Microsoft Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008, or Windows Vista to print from any Windows application and make full use of their Canon printers. This machine supports two types of printer drivers: Hewlett-Packard's PCL (Printer Control Language) printer driver including the PCL5c, PCL5e, and PCL6 printer drivers, and Canon's UFRII LT (Ultra Fast Rendering II Lite) printer driver. For installing the driver to send a print job to the machine over a network, see "Network Connection."
Using the UFRII LT printer driver, the various data processing tasks conventionally executed within the printer are appropriately divided between the host Computer and the printer to greatly reduce the overall printing time. The workload can be delegated to match the output data, thus realizing a significant increase in speed through optimization.
The PCL5c, PCL5e, and PCL6 printer drivers can be used with most kinds of business application software. The PCL5c printer driver is for color printers, the PCL5e printer driver is for black-and-white printers, and the PCL6 printer driver is for both color and black-and-white printers. PCL6 is an advanced version of PCL5c and PCL5e, and offers superior printing quality and speed. This machine supports the PCL5e and PCL6 printer drivers. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
Printing through USB Connection |
Printing through Network Connection |
Where to Find Help (Print) |
Printing through USB Connection |
To install the printer driver through a USB connection, see "USB Connection." |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
Printing through Network Connection |
To install the printer driver through network, see "Network Connection." |
Where to Find Help (Print) |
Here is where to get immediate help if you are having problems installing or using the printer driver.
Any hints, enhancements, limitations, and restrictions you need to be aware of when installing and using your printer driver are included in the README.TXT file provided with the driver. The README.TXT file is located in the [DRIVERS] folder.
You can locate additional help for questions you may have regarding your printer in the Online Help provided with the driver. In the printer properties dialog box, you can click [Help] to display additional information about every feature and option in the PCL5c, PCL5e, PCL6 and UFRII LT printer driver. For instructions on how to display the Online help, see "Viewing the Online Help (Print)." See the Online Help for the detailed information on specifying PCL and UFR II options.
If the Online Help does not provide the information you need, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or service provider. |
Printing Fundamentals |
This section explains how to print a document and how to display the online help. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
Printing with the Printer Driver |
Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand |
Setting the Printer Configuration |
Viewing the Online Help (Print) |
Printing with the Printer Driver |
The procedure for printing a document created in application software is as follows. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
|
The printer driver screen is displayed.
|
The printer driver screen is displayed. |
|
Printing begins. |
Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand |
To change the printing options, follow the procedure below. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
The [Printers] folder is displayed.
|
The printer driver screen is displayed.
|
See "Printing Functions " to find what you can configure in each sheet. |
The settings made on the printing preferences screen in this procedure apply to all Windows applications and remain in effect until you change those settings.
|
Setting the Printer Configuration |
To change the printer properties, follow the procedure below. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
The [Printers and Faxes] folder is displayed.
|
The printer properties screen is displayed. |
|
|
Viewing the Online Help (Print) |
To view the online help, follow the procedure below. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand," for instructions on how to display the printer driver screen. |
The online help is displayed. |
Printing Functions |
This section explaines what you can do in each sheet of the printer driver UI. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
Common Functions |
[Page Setup] Sheet |
[Finishing] Sheet |
[Paper Source] Sheet |
[Quality] Sheet |
Common Functions |
The following functions are common to all sheets. The numbers in the descriptions correspond with the ones in the image of the screen at the bottom. |
1 | Selecting a Profile for Printing You can select a profile to conveniently repeat the same print settings. |
4 | Preview The settings configured in each sheet are displayed in the preview. |
|
2 | Adding/Editing Profiles You can add and edit profile settings. |
5 | Verifying Settings You can verify the settings specified in each sheet. |
|
3 | Changing the Output Method You can change the output method, e.g. storing a document in an inbox. |
![]() |
[Page Setup] Sheet |
In the [Page Setup] sheet, you can configure the following settings. The numbers in the descriptions correspond with the ones in the image of the screen at the bottom. |
1 | ![]() |
Enables you to select the paper size actually output from the printer |
4 | ![]() |
Prints pages with a watermark (such as "COPY") superimposed on the document. |
|
2 | ![]() |
Print Direction Sets the print direction relative to the orientation of the paper. |
5 | ![]() |
Page Border Prints each page with a border. |
|
3 | ![]() |
Prints multiple pages arranged on one sheet of paper. |
5 | ![]() |
Header/Footer Prints pages with headers and/or footers with the date, page number, etc. |
![]() |
[Finishing] Sheet |
In the [Finishing] sheet, you can configure the following settings. |
1 | ![]() |
Prints on the front and back of the paper. |
3 | ![]() |
Collating When printing multiple sets of copies, outputs each set separately in page order. |
|
2 | ![]() |
Prints pages in a sequence that allows them to be folded and grouped into a booklet when output. |
4 | ![]() |
Grouping When printing multiple sets of copies, outputs the pages in groups according to their page numbers. |
|
![]() |
[Paper Source] Sheet |
In the [Paper Source] sheet, you can do the following. |
1 | ![]() |
Printing on Transparencies Prints on transparencies. You can also insert interleaving pages between the transparencies. |
![]() |
[Quality] Sheet |
On the [Quality] sheet, you can configure the following settings. |
1 | ![]() |
Objective Enables you to conveniently select the appropriate settings for the current content. |
3 | ![]() |
Grayscale Setting Adjusts grayscale settings manually. |
|
2 | ![]() |
Toner Reduction Prints with a reduced amount of toner. |
![]() |
Scaling Documents |
You can enlarge or reduce documents to match the output paper size, such as reducing a document created in letter size to print on statement, or enlarging a document created in statement size to print on letter. |
![]() |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand," for instructions on how to display the printer driver screen. |
|
The document is scaled automatically according to the settings made in [Page Size] and [Output Size]. |
|
|
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet |
This mode enables you to reduce multiple pages to fit onto one sheet of paper. You can make well-organized documents by editing multiple materials onto one sheet. And you can cut down print costs by saving paper, and it is also useful for saving space. |
![]() |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand," for instructions on how to display the printer driver screen. |
|
The output image is displayed in the preview area. |
|
2-sided Printing |
This mode enables you to make two-sided printing. You can cut down print costs by half when copying in large quantities. |
![]() |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand," for instructions on how to display the printer driver screen. |
|
The output image is displayed in the preview area. |
|
Booklet Printing |
You can create a booklet by printing 2 pages on both sides of each sheet of paper. |
![]() |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand," for instructions on how to display the printer driver screen. |
The [Detailed Settings for Booklet] dialog box opens. |
The [Finishing] sheet is displayed.
|
|
Poster Printing |
You can enlarge a one-page image and print it over multiple pages. You can then glue the printed pages together to create a poster. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand," for instructions on how to display the printer driver screen. |
The output image is displayed in the preview area. |
|
Watermark Printing |
You can print a watermark (such as "CONFIDENTIAL" or "COPY") on a document created using an application. You can register the customized watermark other than the various predefined watermarks. |
![]() |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand," for instructions on how to display the printer driver screen. |
The output image is displayed in the preview area.
|
|
Viewing the Print Preview |
You can display a preview and verify the print results prior to printing. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
See "Printing with the Printer Driver," for instructions on how to display the printer driver screen. |
|
See "Printing Functions " to find what you can configure in each sheet. |
The [Canon PageComposer] dialog box is displayed. |
The print preview is displayed.
|
Selecting a Profile for Printing |
Combinations of printer driver settings corresponding to a variety of printing purposes are provided with the printer driver as "profiles". This enables you to print documents according to a desired objective by simply selecting a profile from the [Profile] list. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand," for instructions on how to display the printer driver screen. |
The output image is displayed in the preview area. |
|
Checking and Canceling Print Jobs |
You can check the numbers of prints and the print results, or you can cancel a print job before the printing starts. |
Checking Print Jobs |
Canceling Print Jobs |
Checking Print Jobs |
You can check the number of prints and the print result of print jobs from the display of the machine. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
The job status for each print job appears on the display. |
![]() |
|
Canceling Print Jobs |
You can cancel a print job from the machine before the printing starts. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you do not want to cancel the job, select <NO>. |
![]() |
|
Printer Settings from the Machine |
This category describes Printer Settings which you can specify from the machine. |
Settings Menu |
Some settings can be made from the machine. For details on the setting procedure and available settings, click the desired title below to access the corresponding page. |
Remark |
|
||||||
Making the Printer Settings from the Machine |
DEFAULT PAPERSIZE |
DEFAULT PAPERTYPE |
COPIES |
2-SIDED PRINTING |
PRINT QUALITY |
PAGE LAYOUT |
COLLATE |
ERROR TIME OUT |
INIT.PRINTER SET |
PCL SETTINGS (PCL Only) |
RESET PRINTER |
Making the Printer Settings from the Machine |
To set up from the machine, select <PRINTER SETTINGS> in the Additional Function menu. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
The <DEFAULT PAPERSIZE> screen is used as an example.
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
DEFAULT PAPERSIZE |
This setting enables you to specify the default paper size when no paper source is specified. The default setting is <LTR>. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
The available settings are <LTR>, <STMT>, <EXECUTIV>, <ISO-B5>, <ISO-C5>, <COM10>, <MONARCH>, <DL>, <A4>, <B5>, <A5>, and <LGL>.
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
DEFAULT PAPERTYPE |
This setting enables you to specify the default paper type for print jobs. This machine has internally defined optimal print modes for each specified paper type. The default setting is <PLAIN PAPER>. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
The available settings are <PLAIN PAPER>, <COLOR>, <RECYCLED>, <HEAVY PAPER 1>, <HEAVY PAPER 2>, <HEAVYPAPER 3>, <BOND>, <3HOLE PUNCH PAPER>, <TRANSPARENCY>, <LABELS>, and <ENVELOPE>.
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
COPIES |
This setting enables you to specify the number of copies printed. The default setting is <1>. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
The available setting is from <1> to <999>.
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
2-SIDED PRINTING |
This parameter enables you to select one-sided or two-sided printing. When <2-SIDED PRINTING> is specified, the document is printed on both sides of the paper. The default setting is <OFF>. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
PRINT QUALITY |
This setting enables you to specify the image quality, density or toner saving mode for printing. |
IMAGE REFINEMENT |
DENSITY |
TONER SAVER |
IMAGE REFINEMENT |
This setting smoothes the jagged outlines of characters and graphics. The default setting is <ON>. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If <ON> is selected, smoothing is performed before printing. If <OFF> is selected, jobs are printed without being smoothed.
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
DENSITY |
This setting adjusts the print density. The default setting is <5>. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
Pressing [ The available setting is from <1> to <9>.
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
TONER SAVER |
This setting enables you to set the Toner Saver function. Toner Saver uses less toner to print documents and may result in longer toner life. The default setting is <OFF>. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
BINDING |
This setting enables you to set the binding position for two-sided printing. The default setting is <LONG EDGE>. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
The available setting is <LONG EDGE> or <SHORT EDGE>.
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
MARGIN |
This setting enables you to set the page margin in inches or millimeters. The settings can be set in increments of 0.01 inches (0.5 mm) from -1.90 inches (-50.0 mm) through +1.90 inches (+50.0 mm). The default setting is <0.00INCHES>. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
The available setting is from -1.90 to +1.90INCHES (-50.0 to +50.0MM). Use [ You can specify the edge along which the margin will be created in the <BINDING> setting (previous setting). To create a margin along one of the edges of the paper, use this setting in combination with the <BINDING> setting.
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
COLLATE |
This setting enables you to set whether to collate the printouts automatically into sets arranged in page order. The default setting is <OFF>. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
ERROR TIME OUT |
When a document is printed on the computer, the machine detects the control commands and starts printing in the appropriate mode. After all the data has been received and the end of the data is detected, the print mode stops. This processing of print data is called a job. If the data for a job does not end, the machine does not start the next job even if it receives other print commands. In cases like this, use the Timeout setting to force jobs to finish if no data is received during the set period of time. If Timeout is enabled, jobs can finish automatically. For example, if print data still remains in the machine because a form feed command cannot be processed, the paper can be fed automatically. If <ERROR TIME OUT> set to <OFF>, jobs will not end automatically. The default setting is <ON> and 15 seconds. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
The available settings are <ON> or <OFF>. If you set to <ON>, jobs will end automatically after the period of time set. The time setting rage is from <5> to <300> seconds.
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
INIT.PRINTER SET |
The menu settings can be reset to the factory defaults by initialising the printer settings. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you select <ON>, the confirmation message is displayed. Select <YES> to initialize the settings or select <NO> to cancel the operation.
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
PCL SETTINGS (PCL Only) |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
ORIENTATION (PCL Only) |
FONT NUMBER (PCL Only) |
FONT SIZE (PCL Only) |
PITCH (PCL Only) |
FORM LINES (PCL Only) |
SYMBOL SET (PCL Only) |
CUSTOM PAPER (PCL Only) |
APPEND CR TO LF (PCL Only) |
ENLARGE A4 (PCL Only) |
ORIENTATION (PCL Only) |
This setting enables you to set the paper orientation. The default setting is <PORTRAIT>. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
The available setting is <PORTRAIT> or <LANDSCAPE>.
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
FONT NUMBER (PCL Only) |
You can set the default font typeface for this printer function using the corresponding font numbers. The default setting is <0>. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
The available setting is from <0> to <120>.
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
POINT SIZE (PCL Only) |
If the number selected in <FONT NUMBER> is that of a proportionally spaced scalable font, this option appears in the PCL menu. It enables you to specify a point size for the default font. The point size can be adjusted in increments of 0.25 points. The default setting is <12.00>. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
The available setting is from <4.00> to <999.75>.
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
PITCH (PCL Only) |
This setting enables you to specify the pitch for the default font in 0.01 cpi (characters per inch) increment. The default setting is <10.00>. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
The available setting is from <0.44> to <99.99>.
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
FORM LINES (PCL Only) |
This setting enables you to specify the number of lines to be printed on a page. The default setting is <64>. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
The available setting is from <5> to <128>.
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
SYMBOL SET (PCL Only) |
This setting enables you to select the symbol set most suited to the needs of the host computer. The default setting is <PC8>. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
The available settings are <DESKTOP>, <ISO4>, <ISO6>, <ISO11>, <ISO15>, <ISO17>, <ISO21>, <ISO60>, <ISO69>, <ISOL1>, <ISOL2>, <ISOL5>, <ISOL6>, <LEGAL>, <MATH8>, <MCTEXT>, <MSPUBL>, <PC775>, <PC8>, <PC850>, <PC852>, <PC8DN>, <PC8TK>, <PC1004>, <PIFONT>, <PSMATH>, <PSTEXT>, <ROMAN8>, <VNINTL>, <VNMATH>, <VNUS>, <WIN30>, <WINBALT>, <WINL1>, <WINL2>, and <WINL5>.
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
CUSTOM PAPER (PCL Only) |
This setting enables you to specify a custom paper size. The default setting is <OFF>. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
If you select <OFF>, skip this step. If you select <ON>;
The available setting is INCHES or MILLIMETERS.
The available setting is from 5.00 to 14.00 (inches) (127 to 356 (mm)).
The available setting is from 3.00 to 8.50 (inches) (76 to 216 (mm)). |
![]() |
|
APPEND CR TO LF (PCL Only) |
This setting enables you to specify whether to append a carriage return (CR) when line feed code (LF) is received. The default setting is <NO>. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If <YES> is selected, the print head moves to the beginning of the next line when line feed code is received. If <NO> is selected, the print head moves down to the next line when line feed code is received, and the margin does not change (such as to the beginning of the next line).
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
ENLARGE A4 (PCL Only) |
This setting determines whether to expand the printable area of A4 size paper to that of Letter size in width. The default setting is <OFF>. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If <ON> is selected, all the area on a page 1/8" (4.23 mm) from the top and bottom edges and 1/8" (3.30 mm) from the left and right edges is available for printing on A4 paper. Only the width increases. If <OFF> is selected, all the area on a page 1/8" (4.23 mm) from the top, bottom, left, and right edges is available for printing on A4 paper.
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
BarDIMM (PCL Only) |
This setting enables you to set whether to use the bar code printing function. The available setting is <ENABLE> or <DISABLE>. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
RESET PRINTER |
You can clear all print jobs in progress and reset all the printer settings to the factory defaults. The default setting is <OFF>. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
When you select <ON>, the reset operation will be performed.
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Scanning Documents to a File Server |
This section describes the things that you must do before sending scanned documents to a file server. |
Overview of Scanner Functions |
This machine enables you to send scanned documents to a file server. Scanned documents are converted to file formats, such as TIFF, and are transmitted to the specified file server. |
Introduction to Using Scanner Functions - Scanning Documents to a File Server |
This machine enables you to send scanned documents to a file server. Scanned documents are converted to file formats, such as TIFF, and are transmitted to the specified file server.
Set the network settings to enable your machine to communicate over the network. (See "Basic Network Settings")
Set the file server settings to enable your machine to communicate with a file server. (See "Setting Scan to File Server") |
Basic Methods for Scanning Documents to a File Server |
This section describes the basic procedure for sending scanned documents to a computer that acts as a file server on a network. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
The SEND indicator lights up and the machine enters the scan standby mode. |
![]() |
![]() |
You can specify the file server addresses only with one-touch keys, coded dial codes, or For information how to specify the file server's address, see "Specifying Destinations (Scan to File Server)." If you want to start sending without adjusting the optional send settings, skip to step 9. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
File server (FTP and SMB): <PDF>, <TIFF (B&W)>,
<PDF (COMPACT)>, <JPEG>
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you have selected <JPEG> in step 5, this setting is not available. <DIVIDE INTO PAGES> is automatically set to <ON> when sending documents in JPEG format. <OFF>: Sends multiple images as a single file without dividing them. <ON>: Separates multiple images and send them as separate files. |
![]() |
![]() |
File server (FTP and SMB): <200x200dpi>, <300x300dpi>, <400x400dpi>, <600x600dpi>, <100x100dpi>, <150x150dpi>, <200x100dpi>
|
![]() |
![]() |
<TEXT/PHOTO>, <TEXT>, <PHOTO> If you have selected <PDF (COMPACT)> as the file format in step 5, the original type is automatically set to <TEXT/PHOTO>. Skip to step 9. |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [
You can set the document's name (see "Naming a Sent Document Using a File Server",) ,and the message body text (see "Message (Scan to File Server)". |
Canceling Scan Documents to a File Server |
Follow this procedure to cancel a transmission in progress. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
Specifying Destinations (Scan to File Server) |
This section describes how to specify the destination to send documents using a file server. You can select a destination stored in the one-touch key or coded speed dial code. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
Specifying Destinations Using the Address Book (Scan to File Server) |
Using the One-Touch Keys (Scan to File Server) |
Using Coded Dial Codes (Scan to File Server) |
Using the Group Addresses (Scan to File Server) |
Specifying a Group from the One-touch keys (Scan to File Server) |
Specifying a Group from the Coded Dial Codes (Scan to File Server) |
Specifying Destinations Using the Address Book (Scan to File Server) |
The Address Book search enables you to search for a recipient registered in the machine. This is useful when you forget which one-touch key or coded dial code the recipient you want is registered under. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
If no recipient is registered in Address Book, <NOT REGISTERED> is displayed. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
For example, if you want to search for a name that starts with the letter "C", press [
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can enter the optional settings by pressing [OK] again. (See "Send Settings (Scan to File Server).") |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 7.
|
Using the One-Touch Keys (Scan to File Server) |
You can specify up to 23 destinations using one-touch keys. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you pressed a wrong key, press If you want to start sending without adjusting the optional send settings, skip to step 5. |
![]() |
You can enter the optional settings. (See "Send Settings (Scan to File Server).") |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 3.
|
Using Coded Dial Codes (Scan to File Server) |
You can specify up to 177 destinations using coded dial codes. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you entered a wrong code, press If you want to start sending without adjusting the optional send settings, skip to step 6. |
![]() |
You can enter the optional settings. (See "Send Settings (Scan to File Server).") |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 4.
|
Using the Group Addresses (Scan to File Server) |
Group Dialing enables you to specify a group of registered destinations in the one-touch keys or coded dial codes. This is useful if you want to send the same document to several destinations. You can specify up to 199 destinations in one group. |
Remark |
|
||||||
Specifying a Group from the One-Touch Keys (Scan to File Server) |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you pressed a wrong key or code, press If you want to start sending without adjusting the optional send settings, skip to step 5. |
![]() |
You can enter the optional settings. (See "Send Settings (Scan to File Server).") |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 3.
|
Specifying a Group from the Coded Dial Codes (Scan to File Server) |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you pressed a wrong key or code, press If you want to start sending without adjusting the optional send settings, skip to step 5. |
![]() |
You can enter the optional settings. (See "Send Settings (Scan to File Server).") |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 3.
|
Sending Originals to More Than One Location (Broadcasting) (Scan to File Server) |
Broadcasting enables you to send the same document to multiple recipients. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
Use the one-touch keys, coded dial codes, favorites buttons, or
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ |
Adjusting Density (Scan to File Server) |
You can adjust the density to the most appropriate level for the original. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
For instructions on specifying destinations, see "Specifying Destinations (Scan to File Server)." |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ |
Selecting Image Quality (Scan to File Server) |
You can adjust the image quality of the document you send. The higher image quality you set, the better the output will be, but the longer the transmission will take. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
For instructions on specifying destinations, see "Specifying Destinations (Scan to File Server)." |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can also press File server (FTP and SMB): <200x200dpi>, <300x300dpi>, <400x400dpi>, <600x600dpi>, <100x100dpi>, <150x150dpi>, <200x100dpi>
|
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ |
2-Sided Originals (Scan to File Server) |
You can set the machine to automatically turn over two-sided originals that are placed in the ADF, and scan each side separately. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
For instructions on specifying destinations, see "Specifying Destinations (Scan to File Server)." |
![]() |
For instructions on selecting sending methods and specifying destinations, see "Specifying Destinations (Scan to File Server)." |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ |
Job Recall (Scan to File Server) |
You can recall the last three addresses, scan settings, and send settings which have been set, and then send your documents. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can change the recalled scan and send settings if necessary. |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ |
Favorites Buttons (Scan to File Server) |
You can register a destination together with any possible combination of send settings in a favorites button. One-touch keys 01 to 04 can be registered as favorites buttons. This feature is useful for registering frequently used send settings. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
Registering a Favorites Button (Scan to File Server) |
Erasing a Favorites Button (Scan to File Server) |
Using the Favorites Buttons (Scan to File Server) |
Registering a Favorites Button (Scan to File Server) |
This section describes the procedure for registering a favorites button. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
For details on each protocol, see "Registering File Server Addresses in One-touch Keys" or "Registering File Server Addresses in Coded Dial Codes." |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
For instructions on entering the file server name, see "Registering File Server Addresses in One-touch Keys" or "Registering File Server Addresses in Coded Dial Codes." |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can enter up to 24 characters (14 characters when <SMB> is selected as the server protocol) for the password. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<PDF>, <TIFF (B&W)>: Select for sending images in black-and-white. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: Sends multiple images as a single file without dividing them.
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can select from <200x200dpi>, <200x400dpi>, <300x300dpi>, <400x400dpi>, <600X600dpi>, <100X100dpi>, <150X150dpi>, and <200x100dpi>.
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Erasing a Favorites Button (Scan to File Server) |
This section describes the procedure for erasing a favorites button. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can also use
|
![]() |
|
Using the Favorites Buttons (Scan to File Server) |
If you frequently send documents with the same document settings to the same destination, store these settings in a favorites button. Then, when you need to specify the destination, all you have to do is select the favorites button containing your stored document settings and the desired destination, and send your document. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you pressed a wrong key, press If you want to start sending without adjusting the optional send settings, skip to step 5. |
![]() |
You can enter the optional settings. (See "Send Settings (Scan to File Server).") |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 3.
|
Sending Originals at a Preset Time (Delayed Sending) (Scan to File Server) |
Delayed sending enables you to start transmission at a specified time. You can store up to 64 delayed sending jobs. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
The document is scanned and stored into memory.
It will be sent to the specified destination at the specified time. If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [
|
Specifying the Data Compression Ratio for Color Send Jobs (Scan to File Server) |
You can set the compression ratio for color scanned data. A high compression ratio reduces the amount of memory used for the document, but results in low quality images. On the contrary, a low compression ratio increases the amount of memory used for the document, but results in high quality images. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Resending Data Automatically When an Error Occurs (RETRY TIMES) (Scan to File Server) |
Retry Times is the mode which automatically resends data when the data cannot be sent. This occurs because the receiver is busy sending or receiving, or when an error occurs. This setting determines the number of retry attempts. You can set from one to five retry attempts, or select <0> to turn the Retry Times mode off. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Standard Send Settings (Scan to File Server) |
This mode enables you to change the standard settings for the Send function, including the scan mode and file format. |
Storing the Standard Send Settings (Scan to File Server) |
Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default (Scan to File Server) |
Storing the Standard Send Settings (Scan to File Server) |
You can change and store the Standard Send Settings. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can specify the following settings:
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default (Scan to File Server) |
You can restore the Standard Send Settings to their default settings. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
To cancel restoring the Standard Send Settings, press [ |
![]() |
|
Send Settings (Scan to File Server) |
You can optionally set the file format, if multiple images are sent as separate files or a single file, resolution, and original type after specifying the file server address. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
For instructions on specifying destinations, see "Specifying Destinations (Scan to File Server)". |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
File server (FTP and SMB): <PDF>, <TIFF (B&W)>, <PDF (COMPACT)>, <JPEG> |
![]() |
![]() |
If you have selected <JPEG> in step 5, this setting is not available. <DIVIDE INTO PAGES> is automatically set to <ON> when sending documents in JPEG format. <OFF>: Sends multiple images as a single file without dividing them. |
![]() |
![]() |
File server (FTP and SMB): <200x200dpi>, <300x300dpi>, <400x400dpi>, <600x600dpi>, <100x100dpi>, <150x150dpi>, <200x100dpi>
|
![]() |
![]() |
<TEXT/PHOTO>, <TEXT>, <PHOTO> If you have selected <PDF (COMPACT)> as the file format in step 5, the original type is automatically set to <TEXT/PHOTO>. Skip to step 9. |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [
|
Naming a Sent Document Using a File Server |
You can enter the name of the document that you want to send. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Message (Scan to File Server) |
You can enter the message body text of the document that you want to send. Messages entered here are sent as a text file. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Specifying the Gamma Value for Sending Color Documents (Scan to File Server) |
If you are sending to a file server destination, you can specify the gamma value used when converting scanned RGB image data to YCbCr. By setting a gamma value corresponding to the gamma value at the receiving end, sent image data can be printed with the appropriate image quality at the receiving end. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can specify the following settings: <GAMMA 1.8>, <GAMMA 2.2>,< GAMMA 1.0>, <GAMMA 1.4> |
![]() |
|
Adjusting Sharpness (Scan to File Server) |
This mode enables you to scan original images with a sharper or softer contrast. To scan originals with text or lines with a sharper contrast, increase the sharpness as setting. To scan originals containing printed images or other halftones with a softer contrast, decrease the sharpness as setting. The default setting is <4> (middle).
If you scan an original containing halftones, such as a printed image, using the Photo mode, the moiré effect (a shimmering, wavy pattern) may occur. In this case, you can lessen this moiré effect by decreasing the sharpness to produce a clearer image.
You can enhance the edges of original images so that faint or fine text is scanned with a sharper contrast by increasing the sharpness. This setting is particularly suited for scanning blueprints and faint pencil drawn images. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
Each time you press [ |
![]() |
|
Checking/Changing the Status of Scanning Data (Scan to File Server) |
The System Monitor enables you to view the transmission results, and monitor the status of the send jobs currently being processed. |
Remark |
|
||||||
Checking/Deleting Scanning Data (Scan to File Server) |
Printing the Scanning Log (Scan to File Server) |
Checking/Deleting Scanning Data (Scan to File Server) |
You can check the status of scanning documents currently being sent or waiting to be sent, then delete unwanted documents as necessary. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you select a document with the message <TX STNDBY> or <TX TRM...>, skip to step 5. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you do not want to cancel the job, press [ |
![]() |
|
Printing the Scanning Log (Scan to File Server) |
You can print the results of scanning transactions. TX REPORT and ACTIVITY REPORT can be set to print automatically. You can also print ACTIVITY REPORT manually. |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<PRINT ERROR ONLY>: Prints a report only when a transmission error occurs. |
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: Does not print the first page. |
![]() |
The following items are displayed in the Transmission Report:
|
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OUTPUT YES>: Prints a report after every 40 transactions. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: Prints a report with the transmission and reception results listed chronologically. |
![]() |
The following items are displayed in the Activity Report:
If you set <LIST PRINT> to <ACTIVITY REPORT> in <REPORT SETTINGS>, you can print the transaction report (last 40 transactions maximum) manually. |
Scanning Documents to a Computer |
Instructions for scanning documents to your computer directly connected with a USB cable. Make sure that the scanner driver is installed. For instructions on how to install the software, see "USB Connection." |
Overview of Scanner Functions |
This machine enables you to scan documents to your computer. |
System Requirements (Scan) |
Instructions for the system environments with which the machine is compatible. |
Remark |
|
||||||
|
Where to Find Help (Scan) |
When you encounter a problem during installation of the driver software or while operating your machine, consult the following: |
See "Troubleshooting."
See "Troubleshooting."
The hints, limitations, and restrictions you need to be aware of when using the ScanGear and iR Toolbox are included in the Readme.txt file provided with these programs. |
Basic Methods for Scanning Documents to a Computer |
This section describes the basic procedure for scanning documents to your computer. |
Remark |
|
||||||
Scanning with [Start] on the Machine |
Canceling Scanning Documents to a Computer |
Scanning with the iR Toolbox |
Scanning with [Start] on the Machine |
You can scan documents and transmit the scanned data to your computer using the operation panel of the machine. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
The SCAN indicator lights up and the machine enters the scan standby mode. |
![]() |
If you are asked to select a program to launch, select "iR Toolbox Ver4.9". The scanned document will be processed according to your settings. When scanning is completed, a folder with the scanning date will be created in the [My Pictures] folder in the [My Documents] folder, and your document will be saved in this folder. (In VISTA, the folder will be created in the [Pictures] folder.) |
Canceling Scanning Documents to a Computer |
During scanning, a scanning progress dialog box is displayed on the computer screen. |
|
|
Scanning with the iR Toolbox |
You can scan a document using the buttons on the iR Toolbox. |
|
You can also open the iR Toolbox by clicking [Start] on the Windows task bar → [(All) Programs] → [Canon] → [iR Toolbox 4.9] → [Toolbox 4.9]. |
[Mail]: The document will be scanned and attached to an e-mail message in your e-mail application. [OCR]: The text will be scanned and read by the OCR software. [Save]: The document will be scanned and saved. [PDF]: The text will be scanned and saved as a PDF file. [Scan-1], [Scan-2]: The text will be scanned and appear in the registered application. You can change the button name by directly entering a new name (up to 8 characters long) over the button name. A dialog box appears for each of the buttons. Example: [Mail] dialog box |
For details, see "iR Toolbox Settings." If you want to keep the same settings for future scans, click [Apply] before clicking [Start].
|
If you select [Display the Scanner Driver] in step 4, the [ScanGear iR] dialog box will appear. |
For details, see "Setting Preferences and Scanning with ScanGear iR." |
When scanning is completed, a folder with the scanning date will be created in the [My Pictures] folder in the [My Documents] folder, and your document will be saved in this folder. (In Windows Vista, the folder will be created in the [Pictures] folder.) If you have applications registered to the [Mail], [OCR], [PDF], [Scan-1], or [Scan-2] buttons, the scanned image will be displayed in the application or attached to an e-mail message after scanning. For details, see "External Program (Mail Program)." For some models, the CD-ROM provided with the machine contains the following applications which can be used with the iR Toolbox. They will be registered in the iR Toolbox buttons at the time of installation. [OCR]: ScanSoft OmniPage SE [PDF]: Presto! PageManager
|
Scanning an Image from an Application |
You can scan an image from a TWAIN- or WIA- (Windows XP/Vista Only) compliant application and use the image in that application. The following is an example of the procedure. |
|
|
|
With Windows XP/Vista, you can use the ScanGear iR or the WIA driver as the scanner driver. |
For details, see "Setting Preferences and Scanning with ScanGear iR," or "Scanning with the WIA Driver (Windows XP/Windows Vista Only)." |
Scanning with the WIA Driver (Windows XP/Windows Vista Only) |
|
Click [Start] on the Windows task bar → select [Control Panel] → [Printers and Other Hardware] → [Scanners and Cameras]. |
|
|
You can select from [Color picture], [Grayscale picture], [Black and white picture or text], and [Custom].
When selecting [Custom], click [Custom settings] to make detailed settings in the [Properties] dialog box. |
You can select from [Flatbed] or [Document Feeder]. |
If you have selected [Flatbed] as the paper source, click [Preview] → drag If you have selected [Document Feeder] as the paper source, select the page size from the drop-down list. |
|
|
|
If you want to publish these pictures to a Web site or order printouts online, select the corresponding option. |
|
Depending on the edition of your Windows Vista, this function may not be supported. |
Click [start] on the Windows task bar → select [Control Panel] → [Hardware and Sound] → [Scan a document or picture] in [Scanners and Cameras]. |
You can open it also from the [File] menu by selecting [New] → [Scan]. |
If you want to use other scanners, click [Change] and select a desired scanner driver icon. |
For details on the settings, see "[New Scan] Dialog Box." |
It starts scanning. Scanned image displays on [Windows Fax and Scan]. When you scan more than one picture, sequential numbers are automatically added to the file names and the image files are saved in the [Scanned Documents] folder in the [Documents] folder. Renaming the image file is available afterward. |
|
Click [Start] on the Windows task bar → select [All programs] → [Windows Photo Gallery]. |
Select [Import from Camera or Scanner] from the [File] menu. |
Or select a corresponding scanner driver icon then press [Import]. |
If you want to use other scanners, click [Change] and select a desired scanner driver icon. |
For details on the settings, see "[New Scan] Dialog Box." |
You can classify the scanned image by typing a tag in [Tag these pictures (optional):]. If you save the scanned image without typing the tag, it will be saved in a new folder created under the [pictures] folder, named by its scan date. |
When you save more than one picture, sequential numbers are automatically added to the file names. Renaming the image file is available afterward. |
You can specify detailed settings for each scan. [Scanner]: The corresponding scanner driver is displayed. Click [Change] to select a desired scanner driver icon. [Profile]: Selects the use for the scanned image from [Add profile], [Last used settings], [Document], and [Photo (Default)].
[Source]: Selects from [Flatbed] (Platen glass) or [Feeder (Scan one side)].
[Color format]: Selects the scanning color type from [Color picture], [Grayscale picture], or [Black and white picture or text]. [File type]: Selects a file format from [BMP (Bitmap Image)], [JPG (JPEG Image)], [TIF (TIF Image)], and [PNG (PNG Image)]. [Resolution (DPI)]: Selects the scanning resolution in dot per inch (50 to 600). [Brightness]: Specifies the brightness (-100 to 100). [Contrast]: Specifies the contrast (-100 to 100) (only for color or grayscale scanning).
With the WIA driver dialog box open, follow the procedure below. On how to display the WIA driver, see "Scanning an Image from an Application." |
You can select from [Flatbed] or [Document Feeder]. |
You can select from [Color picture], [Grayscale picture], [Black and white picture or text], and [Custom Settings]. |
The [Advanced Properties] dialog box appears. |
For details on the settings, see "Advanced Properties." |
If you have selected [Flatbed] as the paper source, click [Preview] → drag If you have selected [Document Feeder] as the paper source, select the page size in [Page size]. |
|
[Appearance]: Shows the preview of sample image. [Brightness]: Specifies the brightness (-127 to 127). [Contrast]: Specifies the contrast (-127 to 127) (only for color or grayscale scanning). [Resolution (DPI)]: Selects the scanning resolution in dot per inch (50 to 600). [Picture type]: Selects the scanning color type ([Color picture], [Grayscale picture], or [Black and white picture or text]). [Reset]: Resets all the current settings to their default values.
|
Setting the Scanning Function for [Start] |
When you scan for the first time using |
Setting Up [Start] to Operate in a Different Way from [Save] |
Setting Up [Start] in the [Settings] Dialog Box |
Setting Up [Start] in the [Scanners and Cameras] Folder |
Setting Up [Start] to Operate in a Different Way from [Save] |
You can also open the iR Toolbox by clicking [start] on the Windows task bar → [(All) Programs] → [Canon] → [iR Toolbox 4.9] → [Toolbox 4.9]. |
The |
Setting Up [Start] in the [Settings] Dialog Box |
In the iR Toolbox, click [Settings] to open the [Settings] dialog box. From the drop-down list, select the scanning function you want to link [Start] to, then click [OK]. |
Setting Up [Start] in the [Scanners and Cameras] Folder |
Click [start] on the Windows task bar → select [Control Panel] → [Printers and other Hardware] → [Scanners and Cameras]. (Windows Vista: [start] → [Control Panel] → [Hardware and Sound] → [Scanners and Cameras]. Windows 2000: [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel] → double-click [Scanners and Cameras Properties].) |
|
|
On Windows XP/Vista: Select the [Events] tab → select the option corresponding to your machine from [Select an event] → select the operation for [Start this program] in [Actions] → click [OK]. On Windows 2000: Select the [Events] tab → select the option corresponding to your machine from [Scanner events] → select the operation for [Start] in [Send to this application] → click [OK].
|
iR Toolbox Settings |
Example: [Mail] dialog box |
Scanner Settings |
Save Scanned Image to |
External Program (Mail Program) |
Confirmation of the Scanned Image and Exif Settings (Confirm the Scanned Image) |
Scanner Settings |
You can specify the scanning mode, resolution, document size, and file size of the scanned image. [Select Source]: Selects where the document is placed ([Platen Glass], [ADF], or [Auto Mode]).
[Input Method]: Specifies if the document to be scanned is 1-sided or 2-sided. You cnnot select this item when [Platen Glass] is selected in [Select Source].
[Paper Size]: Selects the size of the document to be scanned. Selecting [Custom] opens the [Paper Size Settings] dialog box which enables you to set the custom paper size. When scanning using the [Save], [PDF], [Scan-1] or [Scan-2] buttons and [Platen Glass] is selected in [Select Source], you can also scan large size documents by selecting [Stitch-assist (11" x 17")], [Stitch-assist (A3)] or [Stitch-assist (Platen x 2)]. (See "Scanning a Large Document.") [Orientation]: Opens the [Orientation] dialog box. This dialog box enables you to specify the orientation of the document. When [2-sided] is selected in [Input Method], select also the binding location of the document. This button is disabled when [Platen Glass] is selected in [Select Source].
[Scan Mode]: Selects the scan mode. The scan modes you can select differ depending on the iR Toolbox button you press.
[Upper Limit of Attached File]: Selects an approximateupper size limit (after compression) for the image you will send. For an ordinary mail message, [150 KB] is recommended. You can specify this item when scanning using the [Mail] button and [JPEG/Exif] is selected in [Save as Type]. [Image Quality]: Selects the scan quality (resolution). When scanning using the [Mail] button, the resolution you can select depends on the setting in [Upper Limit of Attached File]. [Display the Scanner Driver]: If you select this check box, all items in the [Scanner Settings] become invalid, and when [Start] is clicked the [ScanGear iR] dialog box appears and enables you to make advanced settings for scanning. This check box is not available when scanning using the [OCR] button. |
Save Scanned Image to |
You can specify the file name, file format, and location to save the scanned image. If you select PDF as a file format, you can also specify the detailed settings for the PDF file. [File Name]: Enter a file name for the scanned image. If you save another file with the same name, four digits starting from 0001 will be attached after the file name. [Save as Type]: Specifies the file type to save the scanned image.
[PDF Settings]: Opens the [PDF Settings] dialog box which enables you to make advanced settings of the PDF file. (See "Creating One PDF File from Two or More Pages.") [Save Scanned Image to]: Shows the location to save the scanned images. To change the location, click [Browse] → select a folder → click [OK]. [Add Scanned Image to]: This item appears instead of [Save Scanned Image to] when [PDF (Add Page)] is selected in [Save as Type]. You can select the PDF file to which you want to add the scanned image. [Save Pictures to a Subfolder with Current Date]: Select this check box to create a folder with current date (e.g. 2008-06-30) in the specified location and save the scanned images in this folder. |
External Program (Mail Program) |
When scanning using the [OCR], [PDF], [Scan-1] or [Scan-2] buttons, you can specify an application to be used to display the scanned image. Click [Set] → select the application to use → click [Open]. You can also specify an application by dragging and dropping the application icon onto the dialog box. When scanning using the [Mail] button, you can specify an e-mail software to which you want to attach the scanned image. The iR Toolbox is compatible with e-mail software such as Outlook Express, Microsoft Outlook, Microsoft Exchange, EUDORA, Netscape Messenger and Windows Mail (Vista only). Click [Set] → select the application to use → click [OK]. If [None (Attach Manually)] is displayed, you have to attach the image file manually. |
Confirmation of the Scanned Image and Exif Settings (Confirm the Scanned Image) |
You can preview the scanned images as thumbnail images, and specify the file type and location to save them.
Select [Confirmation of the Scanned Image and Exif Settings] (for the [PDF] button, [Confirm the Scanned Image]) → click [Start]. When the scanning is complete, the thumbnail of the scanned image is displayed. Confirm the thumbnail image → specify the file type and location → press [Save] or [Forward]. [Save as Type]: Specifies the file type to save the scanned image. The available file types are the same as those listed in "Save Scanned Image to." [Exif Settings]: Opens the [Exif Settings] dialog box which enables you to set the Exif information when [JPEG/EXIF] is selected in [Save as Type]. (See "Exif Settings.") [PDF Settings]: Opens the [PDF Settings] dialog box which enables you to make advanced settings of the PDF file. (See "Creating One PDF File from Two or More Pages.") This button appears when [PDF], [PDF (Multiple Pages)] or [PDF (Add Page)] is selected in [Save as Type]. [Save Scanned Image to]: Specifies the location to save the scanned image. [Add Scanned Image to]: This item appears instead of [Save Scanned Image to] when [PDF (Add Page)] is selected in [Save as Type]. You can select the PDF file to which you want to add the scanned image. [Save Pictures to a Subfolder with Current Date]: Select this check box to create a folder with current date in the specified location and save the scanned images in this folder. This check box is not available when [PDF (Add Page)] is selected in [Save as Type]. [Save]: Press to save the scanned images in the specified location. [Forward]: This button appears instead of [Save] when an application is specified in the [Mail Program] or the [External Program] setting. You can forward the scanned images to the application. [Cancel]: Cancels the operation and returns to the previous window. Deletes all the images scanned in the operation. |
You can attach extra information in the EXIF format, such as the description of the image, the date when the image was scanned, etc., to the JPEG files. Select a scanned image from the drop-down list to view and add information for the image. [Basic Information]: Displays the information automatically acquired by scanning. [Advanced Information]: Displays the extra information you enter. [Apply the Same Setting of Input Items Automatically]: Select this check box to use the same values you have specified in the previous scanning operation. |
Creating One PDF File from Two or More Pages |
You can scan two or more pages and make them into one PDF file. |
|
You can also open the iR Toolbox by clicking [Start] on the Windows task bar → [(All) Programs] → [Canon] → [iR Toolbox 4.9] → [Toolbox 4.9]. |
|
|
The [PDF Settings] dialog box appears. |
[Create Searchable PDF]: Converts the characters in the document to text data and makes the PDF document searchable with keywords. [Text Language]: Select the language of the text to be scanned. The characters may be recognized more accurately if you select [English] from this drop-down list and set [Image Quality] to [300 dpi] or higher in [Scanner Settings]. (See "Scanner Settings.") [PDF Compression]: Select [High] for color images such as photos or illustrations to be further compressed, reducing the file size. |
When you set the document on the platen glass, the following dialog box appears as each page is scanned. To continue to scan, place the next page and click [Next]. When scanning is completed, click [Finish]. |
Scanning a Large Document |
You can scan a document larger than the platen glass by combining pieces scanned separately. |
Remark |
|
||||||
|
You can also open the iR Toolbox by clicking [Start] on the Windows task bar → [(All) Programs] → [Canon] → [iR Toolbox 4.9] → [Toolbox 4.9]. |
|
|
The [Stitch-assist] wizard dialog box appears. |
|
To make adjustment, click the image and move it using the arrow keys on the keyboard. You can also move the image by dragging it. |
Any blank areas inside the cropping frame will be saved as white background. |
|
Setting Preferences and Scanning with ScanGear iR |
The ScanGear iR enables you to preview the image to be scanned and make detailed adjustments for the image. To use the ScanGear iR, select [Display the Scanner Driver] in the iR Toolbox, or scan from an application. |
Remark |
|
||||||
Switching between Simple Mode and Advanced Mode |
Using Simple Mode |
Using Advanced Mode |
Specifying the Parameters of a Scan |
Advanced Mode Settings |
Determining Resolution |
Switching between Simple Mode and Advanced Mode |
The ScanGear iR has two modes: [Simple Mode] and [Advanced Mode]. With [Advanced Mode] you can perform detailed settings such as resolution and contrast. To switch between two modes, click the corresponding tab. |
Remark |
|
||||||
Using Simple Mode |
|
[Photo (Color)]: To scan color photos. [Magazine (Color)]: To scan color magazines with the Descreen function. [Newspaper (B&W)]: To scan text and line drawings. [Document (Grayscale)]: To scan color images or text in monochrome. Appropriate for scanning high-resolution monochrome images. [Document (Color) ADF]: To scan color documents on the ADF. [Document (Grayscale) ADF]: To scan Grayscale documents on the ADF. If you select [Document (Color) ADF] or [Document (Grayscale) ADF], skip to step 4.
|
A preview of the scanned image appears in the preview window. |
You can select from [Print (300 dpi)], [Image display (150 dpi)], or [OCR (300 dpi)], depending on the document type you selected in step 2. For details, see "Determining Resolution." |
The options you can select vary depending on what you selected in step 4. Click |
To adjust the cropping frame, click
|
|
Selecting [Add/Delete] for [Output Size] opens the [Add/Delete the Output Size] dialog box. This dialog box enables you to add and delete the custom output size. [Purpose]: Selects the use for the scanned image from [Print] or [Image Display]. This setting is available with [Advanced Mode] only. [Output Size Name]: Specifies the output size name you want to register. [Width]: Specifies the width of the output size. [Height]: Specifies the height of the output size. [Unit]: Selects the unit of measurement for the output size. [Add]: Adds the specified output size to the [Output Size List]. [Delete]: Deletes the selected output size from the [Output Size List]. [Save]: Saves added or deleted output sizes.
|
Using Advanced Mode |
|
For details on the settings, see "Advanced Mode Settings." If you select [ADF (1-sided)] or [ADF (2-sided)] in [Original Input Method], skip to step 4.
|
|
For details, see "Specifying the Parameters of a Scan." |
[Select All Crops]: When this button is used, all the cropping frames reflect the settings made on the [Advanced Mode] tab sheet. [Zoom]: Click this button to rescan the focal cropping area of the preview image at a higher level of magnification. Once clicked, this button changes into [Undo]. The image retunes to its original size by clicking [Undo]. |
Specifying the Parameters of a Scan |
You can create scan areas (cropping areas) for images shown in the preview area. When you click [Scan], only the cropped area will be scanned. |
Remark |
|
||||||
After previewing, click
Select
You can create another cropping frame even if there is already one in the preview area. Click and drag the mouse cursor outside the existing cropping frame to create a new cropping frame in that area. You can create up to 10 cropping areas. By clicking [Scan] once, all the cropped areas will be scanned. (Scanning will continue until all selected areas have been scanned.) The most recently created cropping frame will become the focal point. To make adjustments to previously created cropping frames, select the frame or frames by clicking on them.
If you want to remove cropping frames, select the frame or frames and do one of the following:
|
Advanced Mode Settings |
|
Favorite Settings enables you to save a set of settings (Input Settings, Output Settings, Image Settings, Color Settings and Preferences) made for the focal cropping frame. If there are no cropping frames, settings for the whole preview area are saved. You can also recall the saved settings and apply them to the selected frames or the whole preview area. |
Remark |
|
||||||
[User Defined]: When this option is selected, specify a value for each setting. [Default]: Restores the default settings. The preview image will be cleared. [Add/Delete]: Opens the [Add/Delete Favorite Settings] dialog box. This dialog box enables you to name and register a set of settings for the current preview image. [Add/Delete] is not displayed when there is no preview image.
[Original Input Method]: Selects where the document is placed from [Platen Glass], [ADF (1-sided)] or [ADF (2-sided)].
[Input Size]: Selects the size of the original document.
Shows the direction of the document being scanned. The icon display varies depending on the settings for [Original Input Method], [Input Size], and [Orientation]. [Orientation]: Opens the [Orientation] dialog box. This dialog box enables you to specify the orientation of the original document. When [ADF (2-sided)] is selected in [Original Input Method], select also the binding location of the original document.
Specifies the width of the input size.
Specifies the height of the input size.
[Color Mode]: Selects the type of document and the way in which it is scanned.
[Output Resolution]: Specifies the resolution for the scan. You can select a resolution from the drop-down list, or enter any value between 25-9600 dpi. If you are using the ADF, enter a resolution between 25-600 dpi. For details, see "Determining Resolution." [Output Size]: Selects the output size of the scanned image. If you select [Add/Delete], the [Add/Delete the Output Size] dialog box will appear and you can add and delete the custom output size (see "Add/Delete the Output Size.") If [Flexible] is selected, enter values in [Data Size]: Shows the data size of the scanned image according to your settings.
[Auto Tone]: Set to [ON] to automatically adjust the tone of the image. You can apply this setting when the preview image is displayed.
[Unsharp Mask]: Set to [ON] to emphasize the outline of an image and make it sharper. It is effective for scanning photos etc., which have a soft focus.
[Descreen]: Set to [ON] to reduce the distorted pattern (moiré) when scanning printed photographs and pictures.
[Reduce Dust and Scratches]: Reduces the dust and scratches on photos.
[Fading Correction]: Rebuilds the color quality that has faded over time. It also increases saturation of dullcolored originals to reproduce a vivid image. You can apply this setting when the preview image is displayed.
[Grain Correction]: Smoothes out the film grain of the image recorded on fast film. The result is smoother tones and higher overall quality.
Using Color Settings buttons, you can adjust the brightness and contrast of the whole image, specify highlights and shadows, and adjust the contrast and balance in an image. The buttons displayed differ depending on your selection in [Color Mode]. When [Text Enhanced] is selected, no Color Settings button is displayed. When [Color], [Color (Documents)] or [Grayscale] is selected in [Color Mode]: When [Black and White] is selected in [Color Mode]: By selecting [Add/Delete] from the drop-down list, you can name and save a set of color settings. For details, see "Tone Curve/Threshold Drop-Down List." Clicking a button opens the dialog box for each color setting. If [Reset] is clicked, all color settings will be reset to the default values.
This dialog box enables you to adjust the levels of brightness and contrast of the image. Click [Channel]: Select a color to adjust either [Red], [Green], or [Blue], or select [Master] to adjust all three colors together when [Color] or [Color (Documents)] is selected in [Color Mode]. Adjust the elements of grayscale when [Grayscale] is selected in [Color Mode]. [Brightness]: Adjust the brightness of the image by moving the slider [Contrast]: Adjust the contrast of the image by moving the slider [Reset]: Resets all the current settings to their default values.
This dialog box enables you to see the data concentration at each brightness level in an image. You can specify the darkest and brightest levels within an image, cut the levels and expand the middle of the tonal range of the image. [Channel]: Select a color to adjust either [Red], [Green], or [Blue], or select [Master] to adjust all three colors together when [Color] or [Color (Documents)] is selected in [Color Mode]. Adjust the elements of grayscale when [Grayscale] is selected in [Color Mode].
Click this button, then click a point in the preview image (or inside the focal crop) to specify the darkest point. You can also enter a value (0 to 245) or move the slider
Click this button, then click a point in the preview image (or inside the focal crop) to specify the midtone point. You can also enter a value (5 to 250) or move the slider
Click this button, then click a point in the preview image (or inside the focal crop) to specify the highlighted point. You can also enter a value (10 to 255) or move the slider
When adjusting a color image, click this button, then click a point in the preview image (or inside the focal crop) to specify the point to execute gray balance adjustment. The gray elements within a scanned image will appear as a neutral gray, and other elements within the image will also have true color reproduction. [Reset]: Resets all the current settings to their default values.
This dialog box enables you to adjust the brightness of a specific area of an image by selecting the type of the tone curve. The tone curve is a graph showing the balance of tone input and output. [Channel]: Select a color to adjust either [Red], [Green], or [Blue], or select [Master] to adjust all three colors together when [Color] or [Color (Documents)] is selected in [Color Mode]. Adjust the elements of grayscale when [Grayscale] is selected in [Color Mode]. [Select Tone Curve]: Select the tone curve from [No Correction], [Over Exposure], [Under Exposure], [High Contrast] or [Invert the Negative/Positive Image]. [Reset]: Resets all the current settings to their default values.
This dialog box enables you to confirm the color settings.
This dialog box enables you to adjust the threshold. By adjusting the threshold, you can sharpen characters in a text document and reduce back-printing such as in newspapers. [Threshold Level]: Adjust the threshold by moving the slider [Reset]: Resets all the current settings to their default values.
This drop-down list enables you to save a set of color settings made for the focal cropping frame. If there are no cropping frames, settings for the whole preview area are saved. You can also recall the saved settings and apply them to the selected frames or the whole preview area. [Custom]: When this option is selected, specify a value for each color setting. Even after the registered settings are applied, [Custom] resumes automatically if you change any setting or make adjustments to the selected cropping frame. [Add/Delete]: Opens the [Add/Delete Tone Curve Settings] dialog box ([Add/Delete Threshold Settings] dialog box, when [Black and White] is selected in [Color Mode]). This dialog box enables you to name and register a set of color settings.
Clicking [Preferences] on the [Advanced Mode] tab sheet opens the [Preferences] dialog box. This dialog box enables you to adjust settings for scanning and previewing.
[Preview at the Start of ScanGear]: Selects the preview operation when you open the ScanGear iR.
[Cropping Frame on Previewed Images]: Sets how the cropping frame is displayed when you preview images.
[Scan without Using ScanGear's Window]: Enables you to scan in a specific color mode when using an application that will not display the [ScanGear iR] dialog box (such as OCR software), overriding the application settings.
[Automatically Quit ScanGear after Scanning]: If selected, the [ScanGear iR] dialog box quits automatically after the image is scanned. Some applications will automatically quit ScanGear iR after scanning irrespective of this setting. [Color Correction]: Selects the type of color correction.
[Always Execute the Auto Tone]: If selected, the image color will always be automatically corrected. This setting is available when [Color], [Color (Documents)] or [Grayscale] is selected in [Color Mode]. [Monitor Gamma]: Enables you to perform gamma correction. Specify the gamma value (0.10 to 10.00) of the monitor for viewing the scanned image. This setting is not reflected in the scanning result when [Black and White] is selected in [Color Mode].
[Select Folder Where Temporary Files are Saved]: Click [Browse] and specify the folder in which the files are saved. [Sound Settings]: Sets the scanner to play music during scanning or play a sound when scanning is completed. You can specify the following files: MIDI files (*.mid, *.rmi, *.midi), Audio files (*.wav, *.aiff, *.aif), MP3 file (*.mp3).
[Test Scanner]: Opens the [Scanner Diagnostics] dialog box, which enables you to confirm normal operation of the scanner. Check that the power cord is plugged in, and the USB cable is connected between the machine and your computer, then click [Start]. |
Determining Resolution |
The data in the image you scan is a collection of dots carrying information about brightness and color. The density of these dots is called "resolution" and "dpi" (dots per inch) refers to the number of dots in one inch. You can specify a resolution in [Image Quality] in the iR Toolbox settings dialog box, or in [Output Resolution] in the ScanGear iR.
Images for display on a monitor in general should be scanned at a resolution of 75 dpi.
Images to be printed should be scanned at a resolution which corresponds to the resolution of the printer.
For example, if you want to print a document which is twice the original size both vertically and horizontally, the resolution of your document will be reduced by half. In such a case, scan the original document at double the resolution so that you can print the document with sufficient quality, even if you double the size of the document. Conversely, if you want to print a document at a reduced size, it should be sufficient to scan at half the resolution.
If you double the resolution, the image data will be four times greater. If the data is too large, processing speed will slow down significantly, and you may experience malfunctions such as lack of memory. Make sure the resolution corresponds to the planned use of the image and set it at the lowest level possible. |
This category describes the things that you must do before using e-mail functions. |
Introduction to Using E-Mail Functions |
This machine enables you to send scanned documents to an e-mail application. Scanned documents are converted to file formats such as TIFF and are transmitted as an e-mail attachment to the recipient's e-mail application.
Set the network settings to enable your machine to communicate over the network. (See "Basic Network Settings.")
Set the e-mail settings to enable your machine to communicate with a mail server. (See "Setting Scan to E-Mail and I-Fax.") |
Basic Methods for Sending E-Mails |
This section describes the flow of sending e-mails. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
The SEND indicator lights up and the machine enters the send standby mode. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
For instructions on specifying destinations, see "Specifying Destinations (E-Mail)." |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
E-Mail (B&W): <PDF>, <TIFF (B&W)> E-Mail (Color): <PDF (COMPACT)>, <JPEG>
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you have selected <JPEG> in step 6, this setting is not available. <DIVIDE INTO PAGES> is automatically set to <ON> when sending documents in JPEG format. <OFF>: Sends multiple images as a single file without dividing them. <ON>: Separates multiple images and send them as separate files. |
![]() |
![]() |
E-Mail (B&W): <200x200dpi>, <300x300dpi>, <400x400dpi>, <600X600dpi>, <150X150dpi>, <200x100dpi> E-Mail (Color): <200x200dpi>, <300x300dpi>, <100X100dpi>, <150X150dpi>
|
![]() |
![]() |
<TEXT/PHOTO>, <TEXT>, <PHOTO> If you have selected <PDF (COMPACT)> as the file format in step 6, the original type is automatically set to <TEXT/PHOTO>. Skip to step 10. |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [
You can set the document's name, a subject line, message body text, and reply-to address, and e-mail priority common to all sending jobs. For instructions, "Optional Settings for an E-Mail." |
Canceling Send E-Mail Documents |
Follow this procedure to cancel a transmission in progress. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
Specifying Destinations (E-Mail) |
This section describes how to specify an e-mail address. You can select a destination stored in the Address Book, a one-touch key, or a coded dial code, or specify a new address. |
Using Numeric Keys (E-Mail) |
Using the Address Book (E-Mail) |
Using the One-Touch Keys (E-Mail) |
Using Coded Dial Codes (E-Mail) |
Using the Group Addresses (E-Mail) |
Sending Originals to More Than One Location (Broadcasting) (E-Mail) |
Using Numeric Keys (E-Mail) |
You can specify a new e-mail address. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you enter a wrong character when specifying an e-mail address, go back to the wrong digit with [ If you want to start sending without adjusting the optional send settings, skip to step 6. |
![]() |
You can enter the optional settings. (See "Send Settings (E-Mail).") |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 4.
|
Using the Address Book (E-Mail) |
The Address Book search enables you to search for a recipient registered in the machine. This is useful when you forget which one-touch key or coded dial code the recipient you want is registered under. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
If no recipient is registered in Address Book, <NOT REGISTERED> is displayed. |
![]() |
![]() |
<NAME SEARCH>: searches a destination by name <ADD/TEL SEARCH>: searches a destination by address |
![]() |
![]() |
For example, if you want to search for a name that starts with the letter "C", press [ [:A]: Letter mode [:1]: Number mode |
![]() |
![]() |
[ [ |
![]() |
![]() |
You can enter the optional settings by pressing [OK] again. (See "Send Settings (E-Mail).") |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 7.
|
Using the One-Touch Keys (E-Mail) |
You can specify up to 23 destinations using one-touch keys. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you pressed a wrong key, press If you want to start sending without adjusting the optional send settings, skip to step 5. |
![]() |
You can enter the optional settings. (See "Send Settings (E-Mail).") |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 3.
|
Using Coded Dial Codes (E-Mail) |
You can specify up to 177 destinations using coded dial codes. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you entered a wrong code, press If you want to start sending without adjusting the optional send settings, skip to step 6. |
![]() |
You can enter the optional settings. (See "Send Settings (E-Mail).") |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [
You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 4. |
Using the Group Addresses (E-Mail) |
Group Dialing enables you to specify a group of registered destinations in the one-touch keys or coded dial codes. This is useful if you want to send the same document to several destinations. You can register up to 199 destinations in one group. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
Specifying a Group from the One-Touch Keys (E-Mail) |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you pressed a wrong key or code, press If you want to start sending without adjusting the optional send settings, skip to step 5. |
![]() |
You can enter the optional settings. (See "Send Settings (E-Mail).") |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 3.
|
Specifying a Group from the Coded Dial Codes (E-Mail) |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you pressed a wrong key or code, press If you want to start sending without adjusting the optional send settings, skip to step 5. |
![]() |
You can enter the optional settings. (See "Send Settings (E-Mail).") |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 3.
|
Sending Originals to More Than One Location (Broadcasting) (E-Mail) |
Broadcasting enables you to send the same document to multiple recipients. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you are specifying destinations registered in Address Book, you can skip this step. |
![]() |
![]() |
Use
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ |
Adjusting Density (E-Mail) |
You can adjust the density to the most appropriate level for the original. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you are specifying the destination registered in one-touch keys or coded dial codes, you can skip this step. |
![]() |
![]() |
For instructions on specifying destinations, see "Specifying Destinations (E-Mail)". |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
[ [ |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ |
Selecting Image Quality (E-Mail) |
You can adjust the image quality of the document you send. The higher image quality you set, the better the output will be, but the longer the transmission will take. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you are specifying the destination registered in one-touch keys or coded dial codes, you can skip this step. |
![]() |
![]() |
For instructions on specifying destinations, see "Specifying Destinations (E-Mail)". |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can also press E-Mail (B&W): <200x200dpi>, <300x300dpi>, <400x400dpi>, <600x600dpi>, <150x150dpi>, <200x100dpi> E-Mail (Color): <200x200dpi>, <300x300dpi>, <100X100dpi>, <150X150dpi>
|
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ |
2-Sided Originals (E-Mail) |
You can set the machine to automatically turn over two-sided originals that are placed in the ADF, and scan each side separately. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you are specifying the destination registered in one-touch keys or coded dial codes, you can skip this step. |
![]() |
![]() |
For instructions on specifying destinations, see "Specifying Destinations (E-Mail)". |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<BOOK TYPE>: The front and back sides of the document have the same top-bottom orientation. <CALENDAR TYPE>: The front and back sides of the document have opposite top-bottom orientations. |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ |
Job Recall (E-Mail) |
You can recall the last three addresses, scan settings, and send settings which have been set, and then send your documents. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can change the recalled scan and send settings if necessary. |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ |
Favorites Buttons (E-Mail) |
You can register a destination together with any possible combination of send settings in a favorites button. One-touch keys 01 to 04 can be registered as favorites buttons. This feature is useful for registering frequently used send settings. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
Registering a Favorites Button (E-Mail) |
Erasing a Favorites Button (E-Mail) |
Using the Favorites Buttons (E-Mail) |
Registering a Favorites Button (E-Mail) |
This section describes the procedure for registering a favorites button. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If a one-touch destination is already registered in the desired one-touch key, select another key, or delete the destination first. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<PDF>, <TIFF (B&W)>: Select for sending images in black-and-white. <PDF (COMPACT)>, <JPEG>: Select for sending color images. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: Sends multiple images as a single file without dividing them. <ON>: Separates multiple images and send them as separate files.
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can select from <200x200dpi>, <200x400dpi>, <300x300dpi>, <400x400dpi>, <600x600dpi>, <100x100dpi>, <150x150dpi>, and <200x100dpi>.
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Erasing a Favorites Button (E-Mail) |
This section describes the procedure for erasing a favorites button. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Using the Favorites Buttons (E-Mail) |
If you frequently send documents with the same document settings to the same destination, store these settings in a favorites button. Then, when you need to specify the destination, all you have to do is select the favorites button containing your stored document settings and the desired destination, and send your document. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you pressed a wrong key, press If you want to start sending without adjusting the optional send settings, skip to step 5. |
![]() |
You can enter the optional settings. (See "Send Settings (E-Mail).") |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [ You can also adjust the following scan settings as necessary, using the keys on the operation panel, after specifying the destination in step 3.
|
Sending Originals at a Preset Time (Delayed Sending) (E-Mail) |
Delayed sending enables you to start transmission at a specified time. You can store up to 64 delayed sending jobs. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you are specifying destinations registered in Address Book, you can skip this step. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
The document is scanned and stored into memory. It will be sent to the specified destination at the specified time. If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [
|
Specifying the Data Compression Ratio for Color Send Jobs (E-Mail) |
You can set the compression ratio for color scanned data. A high compression ratio reduces the amount of memory used for the document, but results in low quality images. On the contrary, a low compression ratio increases the amount of memory used for the document, but results in high quality images. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Resending Data Automatically When an Error Occurs (RETRY TIMES) (E-Mail) |
Retry Times is the mode which automatically resends data when the data cannot be sent. This occurs because the receiver is busy sending or receiving, or when an error occurs. This setting determines the number of retry attempts. You can set from one to five retry attempts, or select <0> to turn the Retry Times mode off. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Standard Send Settings (E-Mail) |
This mode enables you to change the standard settings for the Send function, including the scan mode and file format. |
Storing the Standard Send Settings (E-Mail) |
Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default (E-Mail) |
Storing the Standard Send Settings (E-Mail) |
You can change and store the Standard Send Settings. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can specify the following settings:
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default (E-Mail) |
You can restore the Standard Send Settings to their default settings. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
To cancel restoring the Standard Send Settings, press [ |
![]() |
|
Send Settings (E-Mail) |
You can optionally set the file format, if multiple images are sent as separate files or a single file, resolution, and original type after specifying the e-mail address. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you are specifying the destination registered in one-touch keys or coded dial codes, you can skip this step.
|
![]() |
![]() |
For details, see "Specifying Destinations (E-Mail)." |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
E-Mail (B&W): <PDF>, <TIFF (B&W)>
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you have selected <JPEG> in step 6, this setting is not available. <OFF>: Sends multiple images as a single file without dividing them. |
![]() |
![]() |
E-Mail (B&W): <200x200dpi>, <300x300dpi>, <400x400dpi>, <600X600dpi>, <150X150dpi>, <200x100dpi>
|
![]() |
![]() |
<TEXT/PHOTO>, <TEXT>, <PHOTO> If you have selected <PDF (COMPACT)> as the file format in step 6, the original type is automatically set to <TEXT/PHOTO>. Skip to step 10. |
![]() |
If the <ORIGINAL SIZE> message appears, press [
|
Optional Settings for an E-Mail |
You can scan an original and send it as an attached file in an e-mail message. You can add the document's name, a subject line, message body text, reply-to address, and e-mail priority. The scanned document can be sent as a JPEG, TIFF, or PDF file. |
Naming a Sent Document Using an E-Mail |
Subject/Message (E-Mail) |
Reply-to (E-Mail) |
E-mail Priority |
Naming a Sent Document Using an E-Mail |
You can enter the name of the document that you want to send. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Subject/Message (E-Mail) |
You can enter a subject of the e-mail message. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Reply-to (E-Mail) |
You can enter a reply-to address. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
E-Mail Priority |
You can select the e-mail priority. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Specifying the Gamma Value for Sending Color Documents (E-Mail) |
If you are sending to an e-mail destination, you can specify the gamma value used when converting scanned RGB image data to YCbCr. By setting a gamma value corresponding to the gamma value at the receiving end, sent image data can be printed with the appropriate image quality at the receiving end. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can specify the following settings: <GAMMA 1.8>, <GAMMA 2.2>,< GAMMA 1.0>, <GAMMA 1.4> |
![]() |
|
Adjusting Sharpness (E-Mail) |
This mode enables you to scan original images with a sharper or softer contrast. To scan originals with text or lines with a sharper contrast, increase the sharpness as setting. To scan originals containing printed images or other halftones with a softer contrast, decrease the sharpness as setting. The default setting is <4> (middle).
If you scan an original containing halftones, such as a printed image, using the Photo mode, the moiré effect (a shimmering, wavy pattern) may occur. In this case, you can lessen this moiré effect by decreasing the sharpness to produce a clearer image.
You can enhance the edges of original images so that faint or fine text is scanned with a sharper contrast by increasing the sharpness. This setting is particularly suited for scanning blueprints and faint pencil drawn images. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
Each time you press [ |
![]() |
|
Specifying the Maximum Data Size for Sending E-Mails |
This function enables you to set the maximum data size for outgoing e-mail documents. If an e-mail transmission exceeds the data size limit, it is split up into several e-mail messages before being sent. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the e-mail message exceeds this data size limit, it is split up into several e-mail messages before being sent. |
![]() |
|
Dividing the Data for Sending E-Mails |
This function enables you to divide an e-mail document into separate files when it is sent if its size exceeds the data size you specify in "Specifying the Maximum Data Size for Sending E-Mails." |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Checking/Changing the Status of E-Mail Documents |
The System Monitor enables you to view the transmission results, and monitor the status of the send jobs currently being processed. |
Remark |
|
||||||
Checking/Deleting E-Mail Transmission Documents |
Printing the E-Mail Log |
Checking/Deleting E-Mail Transmission Documents |
You can check the status of e-mail documents currently being sent or waiting to be sent, then delete unwanted documents as necessary. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you do not want to cancel the job, press [ |
![]() |
|
Printing the E-Mail Log |
You can print the results of scanning transactions. TX REPORT and ACTIVITY REPORT can be set to print automatically. You can also print ACTIVITY REPORT manually. |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<PRINT ERROR ONLY>: Prints a report only when a transmission error occurs. |
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: Does not print the first page. |
![]() |
The following items are displayed in the Transmission Report:
|
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OUTPUT YES>: Prints a report after every 40 transactions. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: Prints a report with the transmission and reception results listed chronologically. |
![]() |
The following items are displayed in the Activity Report:
|
Settings from a PC |
This category describes how to set the machine using the Remote UI software. If you are using the imageRUNNER 1025, an optional network board is required to use the Remote UI functions. Depending on the system configuration and product purchased, some functions may not be available. |
System Requirements |
The Remote UI has been confirmed to work in the following system environments. |
Windows |
|
Macintosh |
|
Using the Remote UI |
The Remote UI software enables you to access and manage the machine connected to a network using a web browser.
|
Starting the Remote UI |
Starting the Remote UI |
To start the Remote UI, follow the procedure described below. |
Remark |
|
||||||
|
The Remote UI screen appears. |
The required data differ depending on the authentication mode you are using.
|
Now you can manage the machine on the web browser.
|
Checking Device Status and Information |
You can view the current status of the machine and also information about the administrator in charge of the machine, the installation location and various machine settings. |
Checking Device Status |
Checking Device Information |
Checking Device Features |
Checking Network Settings |
Checking Counter |
Checking Device Status |
The [Status] screen appears displaying the remaining amount of paper in the various paper sources and any error messages. To check details of errors, click [Error Information]. |
Checking Device Information |
The [Information] screen appears displaying information related to the machine, such as the system manager's information and the location of the machine. |
Checking Device Features |
The [Features] screen appears displaying following items depending on the current system configuration:
|
Checking Network Settings |
The [Network] screen appears displaying information about the network interface and any network protocols that are enabled. |
Checking Counter |
The [Counter Check] screen appears displaying the total number of pages that have been output for printing, copying, and received job printing. |
Job Management |
The Remote UI enables you to manage print jobs. It also enables you to view the sending and receiving results of fax jobs. |
Remark |
|
||||||
Managing Print Jobs |
Viewing the Print Job Log |
Viewing the Activity Log |
Managing Print Jobs |
You can use the Remote UI to manage print jobs that are being processed by the machine, or are held in the print queue. |
Remark |
|
||||||
A list of print jobs being waiting or processed by the machine appears. |
You cannot recover the job once it is deleted. |
Viewing the Print Job Log |
The Remote UI enables you to view the [Print Log]. |
Remark |
|
||||||
The [Print Log] screen appears displaying information about print jobs that have already been processed by the machine.
Example: NG (#0816) Cause: The page limit for printing reached the maximum. Remedy: Increase the page limit, or do not set the limit. (See "Managing the Department/User ID.") |
Viewing the Activity Log |
The Remote UI enables you to view the [Activity Log] of send and receive jobs. The [Activity Log] shows up to 40 most recent transactions. |
The [Activity Log] screen appears displaying information about send and receive jobs that have already been processed by the machine. |
Managing the Address Book |
The Remote UI enables you to view and modify the Address Book data. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
Registering, Editing, Deleting Coded Dial |
Registering, Editing, Deleting One-touch Speed Dial |
Registering, Editing, Deleting Favorites Buttons |
Registering, Editing, Deleting Coded Dial |
If the Address Book is protected by a password, a screen prompting you to enter the password appears. Enter the password → press [OK].
To view/edit the registered addresses: To delete the registered addresses:
|
Registering, Editing, Deleting One-touch Speed Dial |
If the Address Book is protected by a password, a screen prompting you to enter the password appears. Enter the password → press [OK].
To view/edit the registered One-touch Speed Dials: To register a new One-touch Speed Dials: To delete the registered One-touch Speed Dials:
|
Registering, Editing, Deleting Favorites Buttons |
If the Address Book is protected by a password, a screen prompting you to enter the password appears. Enter the password → press [OK].
To view/edit the registered Favorites Buttons: To register a new Favorites Button: To clear a registered Favorites Button:
|
Customizing System Settings |
The Remote UI enables you to specify the machine's system settings. |
Remark |
|
||||||
|
|
|
|
When the Department ID Management mode is deactivated, the setting items for the System Manager ID are not displayed. |
Specifying Forwarding Settings |
The Remote UI enables you to automatically forward received documents to specified addresses. To use this function, you need to specify the forwarding settings in two ways, and depending on the settings the function will work differently:
|
Remark |
|
||||||
|
|
Items for Fax:
Items for I-Fax:
|
|
|
If you select [All], all the forwarding settings stored in the machine are displayed. |
|
|
|
|
Managing the Department/User ID from a Computer |
By registering a Department/User ID and password for each department/user, you can manage the machine by limiting its use to only those who enter the correct Department/User ID and password. Department/User IDs and passwords for up to 1000 departments/users can be registered. You can also set the page limit for each department to copy, print, and scan for sending documents. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
|
|
|
Department ID registration screen User ID registration screen
|
Import/Export Function |
The Remote UI enables you to save the Address Book and other settings information, such as a file that can be loaded into the machine when needed. This function is useful when you want to use the same settings on another machine, and for backing up. The Import/Export function is intended for data exchange, and is available only through the Remote UI. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
Saving the Address Book (Export) |
Loading an Address Book (Overwrite/Import) |
Saving User Management Data in Files (Export) |
Loading User Management Data Files (Overwrite/Import) |
Saving Additional Functions Settings in Files (Export) |
Loading Additional Functions Settings Files (Overwrite/Import) |
Saving the Address Book (Export) |
You can store the Address Book as a file in your computer. |
|
|
The file is saved in the specified location. |
Loading an Address Book (Overwrite/Import) |
You can load address books into the machine from saved files. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
|
|
|
Saving User Management Data in Files (Export) |
You can store User Management Data as a file in your computer. |
Remark |
|
||||||
|
|
The file is saved in the specified location. |
Loading User Management Data Files (Overwrite/Import) |
You can load User Management Data into the machine from saved files. |
Remark |
|
||||||
|
|
|
Saving Additional Functions Settings in Files (Export) |
You can store Additional Functions settings as a file in your computer. |
|
|
The file is saved in the specified location. |
Loading Additional Functions Settings Files (Overwrite/Import) |
You can load Additional Functions settings into the machine from saved files. |
|
|
|
Device Custom Settings |
The machine's custom settings can be edited with the Remote UI. |
Remark |
|
||||||
Common Settings |
Timer Settings |
Copy Settings |
TX Settings (Send/Receive Settings - Common Settings) |
RX Settings (Send/Receive Settings - Common Settings) |
User Settings (Send/Receive Settings - Fax Settings) |
TX Settings (Send/Receive Settings - Fax Settings) |
RX Settings (Send/Receive Settings - Fax Settings) |
Report Settings |
Printer Settings |
PCL Settings (PCL Only) |
Network Settings |
Common Settings |
|
|
Timer Settings |
|
|
Copy Settings |
|
|
TX Settings (Send/Receive Settings - Common Settings) |
|
|
RX Settings (Send/Receive Settings - Common Settings) |
|
|
User Settings (Send/Receive Settings - Fax Settings) |
|
|
TX Settings (Send/Receive Settings - Fax Settings) |
|
|
RX Settings (Send/Receive Settings - Fax Settings) |
|
|
Report Settings |
|
|
Printer Settings |
|
|
PCL Settings (PCL Only) |
|
|
Network Settings |
The Remote UI enables you to specify the machine's network settings.
|
|
Network Settings |
This category describes how to set the machine and your network environment to use the network functions. |
Basic Network Settings |
This machine has a USB connector and LAN connector. If the machine is connected to a network using a LAN cable, you can use the machine as a network printer, or use functions such as the I-fax function, which lets you send and receive faxes over the Internet. |
Remark |
|
![]() |
|
||||
![]() |
If you use the machine as a local printer, connect the machine directly to a computer using a USB cable. (See "Connection between a Computer and the Machine.") |
Setting and Checking the IP Address |
Setting the IP address to the machine allows it to communicate with computers on the network. |
Setting IP Address |
The following are the procedures for specifying the IP Address settings. If you set IP address automatically using such as DHCP, you can confirm the IP address settings by performing the procedure in "Confirming IP Address Settings" after configuring the IP Address settings. |
Setting IP Address Automatically |
Setting IP Address Manually |
Confirming IP Address Settings |
Remark |
|
![]() |
|
||||
Setting IP Address Automatically |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<1. DHCP>: the machine obtains the necessary information for communication via DHCP. <2. BOOTP>: the machine obtains the necessary information for communication via BOOTP. <3. RARP>: the machine obtains the necessary information for communication via ARP. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
Setting IP Address Manually |
The following are the procedures for specifying the IP address manually. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Confirming IP Address Settings |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Setting Scan to E-Mail and I-Fax |
This section describes procedures for setting scan to e-mail and I-fax. |
Scan to E-Mail and I-Fax |
Using this feature, you can scan a document and send it as an attached file from this machine without using your computer. If a recipient's address is registered in advance, you can do this very easily.
This feature is useful when you want to send paper copies of documents to your customers or peers quickly. |
System Requirements |
The following system environments are compatible when using the scan to e-mail and I-fax features in this machine:
|
Remark |
|
![]() |
|
||||
Setup Procedures for Scan to E-Mail and I-Fax |
To set up the scan to e-mail and I-fax functions, follow the procedure below. |
Remark |
|
![]() |
|||||
|
|
|
|
Confirming Necessary Information for Scan to E-Mail and I-Fax |
You may set the e-mail account you are currently using to this machine if you intend to use this machine only for sending a document scanned using the scan to e-mail and I-fax functions in this machine. |
SMTP server address: | This is the server address to send an e-mail. |
Authentication method: | The following two authentication methods are supported. (The authentication may not be required depending on the internet provider.) •SMTP authentication This is the authentication method in which the SMTP server checks the user name and password before sending e-mails. •POP before SMTP This is the authentication method in which the POP server checks the POP address and POP password before sending e-mails. If your provider uses this method, you need to make settings both to send e-mails in this machine. |
Preparing to Receive I-Faxes |
If the provider uses POP before SMTP as the authentication method to send e-mails or if you want this machine to receive I-faxes, you need another POP 3 e-mail account for this machine in addition to the e-mail account you are currently using. For details on the issue of another e-mail account, please consult with your internet provider or network administrator. To make settings, the following information is required. |
Remark |
|
![]() |
|||||
POP server: | The server address that is used when receiving e-mails. In some cases, the address is same as the SMTP server address. |
POP address: | This is sometimes called as a mail account or mail ID. |
POP password: | The password that is required to receive e-mails. |
Checking Your E-mail Account |
If you want to set the e-mail account you are currently using to this machine, you can view information required for the setting on your e-mail software in use. Taking Outlook Express 6.x (the e-mail software included with Windows XP) as an example, this section describes the procedures to check your e-mail account. |
Remark |
|
![]() |
|||||
For Outlook Express 6.x: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Settings from the Machine (E-Mail/I-Fax) |
To set up the scan to e-mail and I-fax function, follow the procedure below. |
Setting up the E-Mail and I-Fax Send Functions |
When No Authentication is Required |
Follow the procedure below to set up the e-mail and I-fax send functions when no authentication is required. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: Does not use an SMTP server that requires POP before SMTP. <ON>: Uses an SMTP server that requires POP before SMTP (method for authenticating users who have logged in the POP server before sending e-mail). |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: Does not use an SMTP server that requires SMTP Authentication. <ON>: Uses an SMTP server that requires SMTP Authentication (method for authenticating users who have logged in the SMTP server before sending e-mail and I-fax). |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
When SMTP Authentication is Used |
Follow the procedure below to set up the e-mail and I-fax send functions when the SMTP authentication is used. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: Does not use an SMTP server that requires POP before SMTP. <ON>: Uses an SMTP server that requires POP before SMTP (method for authenticating users who have logged in the POP server before sending e-mail). |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: Does not use an SMTP server that requires SMTP Authentication. <ON>: Uses an SMTP server that requires SMTP Authentication (method for authenticating users who have logged in the SMTP server before sending e-mail and I-fax). |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
When POP before SMTP Authentication is Used |
Follow the procedure below to set up the e-mail and I-fax send functions when the POP before SMTP authentication is used. |
Remark |
|
![]() |
|||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: Does not use an SMTP server that requires POP before SMTP. <ON>: Uses an SMTP server that requires POP before SMTP (method for authenticating users who have logged in the POP server before sending e-mail). |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: Does not use an SMTP server that requires SMTP Authentication. <ON>: Uses an SMTP server that requires SMTP Authentication (method for authenticating users who have logged in the SMTP server before sending e-mail and I-fax). |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
When a POP Server is Used |
Follow the procedure below to set up the I-fax reception Functions when a POP server is used. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: Does not receive I-fax using the machine's own SMTP receiving function. If you want to receive I-fax using a POP server, select <OFF>. <ON>: Receives I-fax using the machine's own SMTP receiving function.
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: Does not receive I-fax using a POP server. If you want to receive I-fax using the machine's own SMTP receiving function, select <OFF>. <ON>: Receives I-fax using a POP server.
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
When the Machine's Own SMTP Receiving Function is Used |
Follow the procedure below to set up the I-fax reception functions when the machine's own SMTP receiving function is used. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: Does not receive I-fax using the machine's own SMTP receiving function. If you want to receive I-fax using a POP server, select <OFF>. <ON>: Receives I-fax using the machine's own SMTP receiving function.
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: Does not receive I-fax using a POP server. If you want to receive I-fax using the machine's own SMTP receiving function, select <OFF>. <ON>: Receives I-fax using a POP server.
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Setting Scan to File Server |
This section describes procedures for setting Scan to File Server. |
Scan to File Server |
Using this feature, you can send a scanned document to a file server on a network. |
System Requirements |
The following system environments are compatible when sending data from the machine to a file server, depending on the type of network used:
|
Remark |
|
![]() |
|||||
Setup Procedures for Scan to File Server |
To set up the Scan to Scan to File Server function, follow the procedure below. |
Remark |
|
![]() |
|||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Setting File Server (FTP) |
This section describes how to set up a computer as an FTP server. |
Remark |
|
![]() |
|
||||
Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista/Server 2008 |
Mac OS X |
UNIX |
FTP Server for imageWARE Gateway |
Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista/Server 2008 |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
|
For Windows 2000/Server 2008, click [Start] on the Windows taskbar → [Settings] → [Control Panel] → [Administrative Tools] → [Internet Services Manager]. For Windows XP, click [start] on the Windows taskbar → [Control Panel] → [Performance and Maintenance] → [Administrative Tools] → [Internet Information Services]. For Windows Server 2003, click [Start] on the Windows taskbar → [Administrative Tools] → [Internet Information Services Manager]. For Windows Vista, click [start] on the Windows taskbar → [Control Panel] → [Performance and Maintenance] → [Administrative Tools] → [Internet Information Services]. |
For Windows 2000, right-click the [Default FTP Site] icon → click [Properties]. For Windows XP/Server 2003, double-click the [FTP Sites] icon → right-click the [Default FTP Site] icon → click [Properties]. For Windows Vista/Server 2008, double-click the [FTP Sites] icon → right-click the [Default FTP Site] icon → click [Properties]. In the [Default FTP Site Properties] dialog box, click the [Security Accounts] tab to display the [Security Accounts] sheet. For Windows 2000, deselect [Allow Anonymous Connections]. For Windows XP/Server 2003/Vista, deselect [Allow only anonymous connection]. Click the [Home Directory] tab to display the [Home Directory] sheet → select both [Read] and [Write]. Click [OK] to close the [Default FTP Site Properties] dialog box. |
For Windows 2000: Right-click the [My Computer] icon on the desktop -> click [Properties]. Click the [Network Identification] tab to display the [Network Identification] sheet → confirm [Full computer name]. For Windows XP/Server 2003: For Windows Vista/Server 2008: |
For Windows 2000, right-click the [My Computer] icon on the desktop → click [Manage] to open the [Computer Management] window. For Windows XP/Server 2003, click [start] or [Start] on the Windows taskbar, right-click [My Computer] → click [Manage] to open the [Computer Management] window. For Windows Vista/Server 2008, click [start] or [Start] on the Windows taskbar, right-click [My Computer] → click [Manage] to open the [Computer Management] window. Under [System Tools], double-click [Local Users and Groups] → right-click the [Users] folder → click [New User]. In the [New User] dialog box, enter the user name in [User name] → enter the password in [Password] → re-enter the password in [Confirm password]. Enter a user name not longer than 20 alphanumeric characters, and a password not longer than 24 (14 for Windows 2000) alphanumeric characters. If [User must change password at next logon] is selected, any new users added must change their passwords in order to send data from the machine. (You cannot change the password from the operation panel.) Confirm the settings → click [Create]. Close the [Computer Management] window. |
Sample destination setting:
|
Mac OS X |
Remark |
|
||||||
|
|
|
Sample setting: Create a folder named "iR_Folder" in the [Public] folder in the [Home] folder. |
|
Sample destination setting:
|
UNIX |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
|
Enter a user name and a password not longer than 24 alphanumeric characters. |
|
Sample destination setting:
|
FTP Server for imageWARE Gateway |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
For details about the settings, see the imageWARE Gateway Users Guide. |
For details about the settings, see the imageWARE Gateway Users Guide.
|
For details about the settings, see the imageWARE Gateway Users Guide.
|
|
Setting File Server (File Sharing) |
To set up File Server (File Sharing), follow the procedure below. |
Remark |
|
||||||
|
|
Settings from the Machine (File Sharing) |
Follow the procedure below to set up the send files function of the machine. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: Does not send data to the file server. <ON>: Sends data to the file server. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Confirming Computer Name and Necessary Components for File Sharing |
To store a scanned document to a shared folder on a computer using the Scan to File server function, you need to set up your computer accordingly. |
If you are using Windows 2000 |
Confirming Necessary Components for File Sharing (Windows 2000) |
If you are using Windows Server 2003 |
Confirming Necessary Components for File Sharing (Windows Server 2003) |
If you are using Windows XP |
Confirming Necessary Components for File Sharing (Windows XP) |
If you are using Windows Vista |
Confirming Necessary Components for File Sharing (Windows Vista) |
If you are using Windows Server 2008 |
Confirming Necessary Components for File Sharing (Windows Server 2008) |
Confirming Computer Name (Windows 2000) |
The computer name is required for setting a shared folder and registering an address. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Confirming Necessary Components for File Sharing (Windows 2000) |
Follow the procedures below to check whether or not the components required for setting the shared folder are installed in your computer. |
|
Check that all the check boxes for the following are selected. If any of the boxes are not selected, select them.
|
|
|
Confirming Computer Name (Windows Server 2003) |
The computer name is required for setting a shared folder and registering an address. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Confirming Necessary Components for File Sharing (Windows Server 2003) |
Follow the procedures below to check whether or not the components required for setting the shared folder are installed in your computer. |
|
Check that all the check boxes for the following are selected. If any of the boxes are not selected, select them.
|
|
|
Confirming Computer Name (Windows XP) |
The computer name is required for setting a shared folder and registering an address. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Confirming Necessary Components for File Sharing (Windows XP) |
Follow the procedures below to check whether or not the components required for setting the shared folder are installed in your computer. |
|
Check that all the check boxes for the following are selected. If any of the boxes are not selected, select them.
|
|
|
Confirming Computer Name (Windows Vista) |
The computer name is required for setting a shared folder and registering an address. |
|
|
|
|
Confirming Necessary Components for File Sharing (Windows Vista) |
Follow the procedures below to check whether or not the components required for setting the shared folder are installed in your computer. |
|
Check that all of the following check boxes are selected. If any of the boxes is not selected, select it.
|
|
|
Confirming Computer Name (Windows Server 2008) |
The computer name is required for setting a shared folder and registering an address. |
|
|
|
|
Confirming Necessary Components for File Sharing (Windows Server 2008) |
Follow the procedures below to check whether or not the components required for setting the shared folder are installed in your computer. |
|
Check that all of the following check boxes are selected. If any of the boxes is not selected, select it.
|
|
|
Setting Shared Folder |
Once you confirm that the required components are installed, set a shared folder in which a scanned document is stored as a file. |
Shared Folder without Access Control Applied |
This is useful when you want to share files with other users over a network without any restrictions. |
![]() |
Follow the procedures below to set the shared folder without access control applied. |
Shared Folder with Access Control Applied |
This is useful when you want to limit access to certain users. |
![]() |
Follow the procedures below to shared folder with access control applied. |
File Sharing without Access Restriction |
Follow the procedures below to set the shared folder without access control applied. |
File Sharing without Access Restriction (Windows 2000) |
File Sharing without Access Restriction (Windows Server 2003) |
File Sharing without Access Restriction (Windows XP) |
File Sharing without Access Restriction (Public Folder) (Windows Vista) |
File Sharing without Access Restriction (Windows Server 2008) |
File Sharing without Access Restriction (Windows 2000) |
Access permissions |
If "Access permissions" are granted to users who are registered to computers, they are authorized to operate folders and files. There are two types of access permissions:
This is to control users who access to the shared folder over the network.
This is to control users who are logged on to their computers to folders. |
Creating the folder in the place where users can find it easily, such as the first level in C drive, is recommended. Ex) C:\share
|
|
If the drive to which the shared folder is set is formatted in NTFS, you need to set the local-level as well as the network-level access permissions.
|
|
|
File Sharing without Access Restriction (Windows Server 2003) |
Access permissions |
If "Access permissions" are granted to users who are registered to computers, they are authorized to operate folders and files. There are two types of access permissions:
This is to control users who access to the shared folder over the network.
This is to control users who are logged on to their computers to folders. |
Creating the folder in the place where users can find it easily, such as the first level in C drive, is recommended. Ex) C:\share
|
|
If the drive to which the shared folder is set is formatted in NTFS, you need to set the local-level as well as the network-level access permissions.
|
|
|
|
File Sharing without Access Restriction (Windows XP) |
If you are using Windows XP Professional or Windows XP Home Edition, use simple file sharing to set shared folders without access control applied. |
Remark |
|
||||||
Creating the folder in the place where users can find it easily, such as the first level in C drive, is recommended. Ex) C:\share |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File Sharing without Access Restriction (Public Folder) (Windows Vista) |
In Windows Vista, you can use the special folder named "Public folder" in which files can be shared with other users on the same network. Using Public folder, you can set a shared folder without access control applied. |
Sharing the Public folder |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Creating a folder to store a file |
You can store a file in the first level of the Public folder. This section describes the procedures to create a new folder to store a file in the Public folder. |
|
|
Sample destination setting:
|
File Sharing without Access Restriction (Windows Server 2008) |
In Windows Vista, you can use the special folder named "Public folder" in which files can be shared with other users on the same network. Using Public folder, you can set a shared folder without access control applied. |
Sharing the Public folder |
|
|
|
|
Creating a folder to store a file |
You can store a file in the first level of the Public folder. This section describes the procedures to create a new folder to store a file in the Public folder. |
|
|
Sample destination setting:
|
File Sharing with Access Restriction |
Follow the procedures below to set the file sharing with access restriction. |
If you are using Windows 2000 |
Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows 2000) |
Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows 2000) |
If you are using Windows Server 2003 |
Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows Server 2003) |
Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows Server 2003) |
If you are using Windows XP |
Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows XP) |
If you are using Windows Vista |
Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows Vista) |
Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows Vista) |
If you are using Windows Server 2008 |
Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows Server 2008) |
Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows Server 2008) |
Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows 2000) |
You need to create user accounts of the users who access the shared folder in advance. This section describes the procedures to create a new account in your computer. |
Remark |
|
||||||
|
|
|
|
|
Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows 2000) |
Once you create the account in your computer, create a shared folder. Add the created account to the shared folder as the user who is permitted to access that folder. Set access permissions for that user to that folder as well. |
Access permissions |
If "Access permissions" are granted to users who are registered to computers, they are authorized to operate folders and files. There are two types of access permissions:
This is to control users who access to the shared folder over the network.
This is to control users who are logged on to their computers to folders. |
Creating the folder in the place where users can find it easily, such as the first level in C drive, is recommended. Ex) C:\share
|
[Computer Name]\[User Name]
|
If the drive to which the shared folder is set is formatted in NTFS, you need to set the local-level as well as the network-level access permissions.
[Computer Name]\[User Name]
|
|
|
Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows Server 2003) |
You need to create user accounts of the users who access the shared folder in advance. This section describes the procedures to create a new account in your computer. |
Remark |
|
||||||
|
|
|
Enter a user name not longer than 20 alphanumeric characters, and a password not longer than 24 alphanumeric characters.
|
|
Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows Server 2003) |
Once you create the account in your computer, create a shared folder. Add the created account to the shared folder as the user who is permitted to access that folder. Set access permissions for that user to that folder as well. |
Access permissions |
If "Access permissions" are granted to users who are registered to computers, they are authorized to operate folders and files. There are two types of access permissions:
This is to control users who access to the shared folder over the network.
This is to control users who are logged on to their computers to folders. |
Creating the folder in the place where users can find it easily, such as the first level in C drive, is recommended. Ex) C:\share
|
[Computer Name]\[User Name]
|
If the drive to which the shared folder is set is formatted in NTFS, you need to set the local-level as well as the network-level access permissions.
[Computer Name]\[User Name]
|
|
|
Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows XP) |
You need to create user accounts of the users who access the shared folder in advance. This section describes the procedures to create a new account in your computer. |
Remark |
|
||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows XP) |
Once you create the account in your computer, create a shared folder. Add the created account to the shared folder as the user who is permitted to access that folder. Set access permissions for that user to that folder as well. |
Access permissions |
If "Access permissions" are granted to users who are registered to computers, they are authorized to operate folders and files. There are two types of access permissions:
This is to control users who access to the shared folder over the network.
This is to control users who are logged on to their computers to folders. |
Creating the folder in the place where users can find it easily, such as the first level in C drive, is recommended. Ex) C:\share
|
|
If the drive to which the shared folder is set is formatted in NTFS, you need to set the local-level as well as the network-level access permissions.
|
|
Sample destination setting:
|
Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows Vista) |
You need to create user accounts of the users who access the shared folder in advance. This section describes the procedures to create a new account in your computer. |
Remark |
|
||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows Vista) |
Once you create the account in your computer, create a shared folder. Add the created account to the shared folder as the user who is permitted to access that folder. Set access permissions for that user to that folder as well. |
Creating the folder in the place where users can find it easily, such as the first level in C drive, is recommended. Ex) C:\share
|
|
|
|
|
Sample destination setting: |
|
Creating a User Account for Accessing a Shared Folder (Windows Server 2008) |
You need to create user accounts of the users who access the shared folder in advance. This section describes the procedures to create a new account in your computer. |
Remark |
|
||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Setting a Shared Folder and Access Permissions (Windows Server 2008) |
Once you create the account in your computer, create a shared folder. Add the created account to the shared folder as the user who is permitted to access that folder. Set access permissions for that user to that folder as well. |
Creating the folder in the place where users can find it easily, such as the first level in C drive, is recommended. Ex) C:\share
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sample destination setting: |
|
Setting File Server (File Sharing) (Mac OS X) |
|
|
|
|
Sample setting: Create a folder named "iR_Folder" in the home folder. |
Sample destination setting:
|
Setting File Server (File Sharing) (UNIX/Linux) |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
|
Set a user name not longer than 24 alphanumeric characters, and a password not longer than 14 alphanumeric characters. |
Sample destination setting:
|
Setting Up a Computer for Printing/Sending a Fax |
This section describes procedures for Setting Up a computer for printing/sending a fax. |
System Requirements |
The following system environments are compatible when printing or sending a fax from a computer:
|
Remark |
|
![]() |
|||||
Setup Procedures for Printing/Sending a Fax |
Before setting up a computer for printing/sending a fax, it is necessary to perform the following setup procedures. |
Remark |
|
![]() |
|||||
|
|
|
Settings from the Machine (Printing from PC/PC Fax) |
You can select the printing method over a TCP/IP network. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: Does not use LPD. <ON>: Uses LPD as the print application. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: Does not use Raw. Skip to step 10. <ON>: Uses Raw as the print application. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: Does not establish bidirectional communication using Port 9100. <ON>: Establishes bidirectional communication using Port 9100. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Setting Printer Connection Method (LPD/Raw) |
All computers that use the machine must have TCP/IP client software installed and must be enabled for TCP/IP network use. For details, see the manuals provided with the operating system.
To print from a computer, you must install a printer driver and specify a setting for the machine destination. The machine destination setting differs depending on the print application used for printing. Use the following information as a guide to determine the print application you are using, and then perform the necessary operations.
|
Remark |
|
![]() |
|||||
For Windows Vista/Server 2008, click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Control Panel] → [Printer] under [Hardware and Sound]. For Windows 2000, click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Settings] → [Printers]. For Windows XP Professional/Server 2003, click [start] on the Windows task bar → [Printers and Faxes]. For Windows XP Home Edition, click [start] on the Windows task bar → [Control Panel] → [Printers and Other Hardware] → [Printers and Faxes]. |
|
|
|
The Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard starts. |
|
After the computer has confirmed that there is a machine in which the entered IP address is assigned, the [Completing the Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] window appears. |
If the dialog box displays [Additional Port Information Required], follow the instructions on the screen to search again, or click [Standard] → click [Canon Network Printing Device with P9100] from the pull-down list → click [Next]. |
|
If you want to use Raw, confirm [Raw] under [Protocol] is selected, and proceed to step 11.
|
|
|
Setting Print Server |
If Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista/Server 2008 is on your network, the following procedure enables you to set up a print server for more efficient management of network printers. Once a print server is set up, print jobs can be managed by the print server. Also, by setting up an alternate driver for the print server, printer drivers can be installed in each computer via the network. |
For Windows Vista/Server 2008, click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Control Panel] → [Hardware and Sound] → [Printers] For Windows 2000, click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [Settings] → [Printers]. For Windows XP Professional/Server 2003, click [start] on the Windows task bar → [Printers and Faxes]. For Windows XP Home Edition, click [start] on the Windows task bar → [Control Panel] → [Printers and Other Hardware] → Printers and Faxes]. |
|
For other operating systems, skip to step 4.
|
|
When the alternate driver is installed, additional windows will open for entering the location of the file containing the printer driver. Follow the instructions in these windows.
|
The shared printer settings are complete. |
Additional Network Settings |
Depending your network environment, additional network settings may be required. |
Remark |
|
![]() |
|||||
Setting SNMP |
Setting Startup Time |
Setting Speed and Duplex |
Setting Dedicated Port |
Setting DNS |
Controlling the Machine Access Using IP Addresses |
Setting WINS |
Setting PASV Mode for FTP |
Setting FTP Extension |
Setting the Use of HTTP |
Setting Port Number |
Setting Proxy |
Limiting the Machine Access to a Certain MAC Address |
Setting SNMP |
SNMP helps monitor the state of the machine and collects information on it. The following two items can be set: <COMMUNITY NAME>: Sets the SNMP community name. You can specify up to two community names. <SNMP WRITABLE>: Enables the computers on the network to access the machine and modify its settings if this item is activated. You can specify this setting for each community separately. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<ON>: When you set or browse each item of the machine with a utility that uses SNMP to obtain information.
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
Otherwise, press [ |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
Otherwise, skip to step15. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Setting Startup Time |
If you connect the machine to a switching hub, it may not be able to connect to a network even though your network settings are set correctly. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can enter the value from 0 to 300 (seconds). |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Setting Speed and Duplex |
You can specify the communication method and Ethernet connection type. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<AUTO>: Automatically determines the communication mode (Half duplex/Full duplex) and Ethernet type (10Base-T/100Base-TX). Skip to step 11. <MANUAL>: You have to manually specify the communication mode and Ethernet type.
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<HALF DUPLEX>: Sends and receives alternately. <FULL DUPLEX>: Sends and receives simultaneously. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<10 BASE-T>: Establish a 10Base-T network connection. <100 BASE-TX>: Establish a 100Base-TX network connection. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Setting Dedicated Port |
To set or browse detailed information on the machine with a Canon printer driver or utility, set <DEDICATED PORT> to <ON>. |
Remark |
|
![]() |
|||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<ON>: If you want to set or browse detailed information on the machine with a Canon printer driver or utility. <OFF>: If you are not using a Canon printer driver or utility. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Setting DNS |
DNS (Domain Name Service) is a service used for associating a host name (which is a name of a computer or a printer on a TCP/IP network) with a unique IP address. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the secondary DNS server address is not required, skip to step10. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<ON>: Enables the machine to register its IP address, host name, and domain name to the DNS server automatically. This function is available in the environment where there is a dynamic DNS server. <OFF>: Disables the DNS dynamic update function.
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Controlling the Machine Access Using IP Addresses |
You can restrict the machine access from the computers on the network by specifying the range of IP addresses allowed/ forbidden to access the machine. |
Remark |
|
![]() |
|
||||
Registering a Single IP Address to Prohibit |
Registering a Range of IP Addresses to Prohibit |
Allowing Machine Access Only from Registered IP Addresses |
Editing Registered IP Addresses |
Deleting Registered IP Addresses |
Registering a Single IP Address to Prohibit |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can set up to four IP addresses or address ranges. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Registering a Range of IP Addresses to Prohibit |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can set up to four IP addresses or address ranges. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Allowing Machine Access Only from Registered IP Addresses |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can set up to four IP addresses or address ranges. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
To specify only one IP address, enter the same address set to <START IP ADDRESS>. To enter another IP address range, repeat step 10 to 14.
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Editing Registered IP Addresses |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
To edit another IP address range, repeat step 8 to 10.
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Deleting Registered IP Addresses |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
To cancel another IP address range, repeat step 8 to 12.
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Setting WINS |
WINS (Windows Internet Name Service) is a service used for associating a NetBIOS name (which is a name of a computer or a printer on a NetBIOS network) with a unique IP address. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: Does not resolve the name with WINS. Skip to step 10. <ON>: Resolves the name with WINS. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Setting PASV Mode for FTP |
Whether you use the PASV mode for FTP depends on the network environment you are using and the settings of the file server you are sending to. Before specifying the PASV mode for FTP, consult your network administrator. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: Disables the PASV mode for FTP. <ON>: Enables the PASV mode for FTP. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Setting FTP Extension |
If you are sending to an imageWARE Document Manager folder, set the FTP server address specified in imageWARE Gateway as the destination. Set <FTP Extension> to <On>. Using imageWARE Document Manager and the Send function of the machine enables you to manage digitized paper documents and computer data on the network. For more information on imageWARE Document Manager, see the appropriate imageWARE Gateway documentation. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: Disables the FTP extension. <ON>: Enables the FTP extension. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Setting the Use of HTTP |
You can restrict the use of Remote UI. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: Does not use the Remote UI. <ON>: Uses the Remote UI. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Setting Port Number |
Depending on your network environment, you can change the port number for each protocol. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
To enter the other port number, repeat step 6 to 7.
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Setting Proxy |
Depending on your network environment, you can use a proxy server for HTTP transaction. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<ON>: Uses a proxy in the same domain. <OFF>: Does not use a proxy in the same domain. |
![]() |
![]() |
Otherwise, press |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Limiting the Machine Access to a Certain MAC Address |
You can restrict the machine access from the computers on the network by specifying the MAC addresses of the computers allowed/forbidden to access the machine. |
Registering MAC Addresses to Allow |
Editing Registered MAC Addresses |
Deleting Registered MAC Addresses |
Registering MAC Addresses to Allow |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: Disables a MAC address filter. Skip to step 9. <ON>: Enables a MAC address filter.
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
Repeat step 7 and 8 to specify other MAC addresses. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Editing Registered MAC Addresses |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
Repeat step 7 and 8 to edit other MAC addresses. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Deleting Registered MAC Addresses |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Managing the Machine |
The machine also enables you to use any of the following software to check the status and to specify the settings on your computer.
|
Machine Management Using Web Browser (Remote UI) |
You can use Remote UI installed in the machine to manage it on a web browser. |
Machine Management Using NetSpot Device Installer |
NetSpot Device Installer is utility software for specifying the initial settings of Canon devices connected to a network. Available on the CD-ROM, NetSpot Device Installer can be accessed directly without installation, enabling network users to quickly and easily specify the initial settings of network devices. |
Security |
This category describes the security functions of this machine. |
Specifying the System Manager Settings |
You can set an ID and a password for the System Manager. Once the System Manager ID/password is set, restrictions can be placed on storing or changing the System Settings. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You must set a System Manager ID to manage the operations of the machine.
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Device Information Settings |
You can set a name for the machine, and enter information regarding its location. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Department ID Management |
You can register a Department ID and password for each department, and manage the machine by limiting its use to only those who enter the correct Department ID and password. This is called Department ID Management. Use Department ID Management to keep track of the copy, scan, and print totals for each department. With Department ID Management, the following settings can be specified: With Department ID Management, the following settings can be specified: |
Remark |
|
||||||
Registering the Department ID, Password, and Page Limit |
Changing the Password and Page Limit |
Erasing the Department ID and Password |
Checking Counter Information |
Clearing Page Totals |
Printing Counter Information (DEPT. INFO LIST) |
Accepting Print Jobs with Unknown IDs |
Registering the Department ID, Password, and Page Limit |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can select <TOTAL PRINT>, <COPY>, <SCAN>, <COLOR SCAN>, or <PRINT>.
|
![]() |
![]() |
The message displayed will vary depending on which function you selected in step 11. Example: <RESTRICT COPY> appears when <COPY> is selected. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
The message displayed will vary depending on which function you selected in step 11. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Changing the Password and Page Limit |
You can change the password and page limit settings that you have registered. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You cannot change the Department ID. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can select <TOTAL PRINT>, <COPY>, <SCAN>, <COLOR SCAN>, or <PRINT>. |
![]() |
![]() |
The message displayed will vary depending on which function you selected in step 11. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
The message displayed will vary depending on which function you selected in step 11. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Erasing the Department ID and Password |
You can erase the Department ID and password that you have registered. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Checking Counter Information |
You can check how much paper was used by the each department. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you select <CLEAR ALL TOTAL>, the counter information is deleted. |
![]() |
![]() |
You can select <TOTAL PRINT>, <COPY>, <SCAN>, <COLOR SCAN> or <PRINT>. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Clearing Page Totals |
You can clear the page totals made for all departments. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Printing Counter Information (DEPT. INFO LIST) |
You can print a list of how much paper was used by each department. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
Printing starts, and the screen automatically returns to the standby mode. |
Accepting Print Jobs with Unknown IDs |
You can specify whether to accept or reject print jobs from computers that do not correspond with a registered Department ID. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Managing User IDs |
The User ID Management function enables you to register information for each of the User IDs, from 0001 to 1000. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Managing ID Cards |
If the optional Card Reader-E1 is attached to the machine, you must insert a control card to operate it. The optional Card Reader-E1 performs Department ID Management automatically. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
Procedure before Using the Machine |
![]() |
![]() |
The standby display appears. |
Procedure after Using the Machine |
![]() |
![]() |
The display returns to the screen for inserting the control card.
|
Flow of Additional Functions Operations |
This section describes the flow of Additional Functions operations when the optional Card Reader-E1 is attached. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
Changing the Password and Page Limit |
This section describes how to change the password and page limit, and how to check the print totals when the control card is being used. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You cannot store a password with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>. If you enter a number that begins with zeros, the leading zeros are ignored.
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
Checking the Page Counts on a Control Card |
You can check the page counts on the control card you are currently using. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
Checking and Printing Counter Information |
You can print a list of how much paper was used by the each department. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
Printing starts, and the screen automatically returns to the standby mode. |
Clearing Page Totals |
You can clear the page totals made for all departments. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Restricting the Remote UI |
This section explains how to set a password for the Address Book, restrict the use of new addresses, set permissions for sending faxes from the fax driver, and confirm entered fax numbers. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Restricting Access to Destinations |
You can send the documents with following restrictions or settings. |
Setting a Password for the Address Book |
Restricting the New Address |
Restricting PC Faxing |
Confirming Entered Fax Numbers |
Setting a Password for the Address Book |
If you set a password, the screen for entering the password appears when you attempt to edit the Address Book. |
Remark |
|
![]() |
|
||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If you enter a wrong password, you have to start over from the first entry. |
![]() |
|
Restricting the New Address |
This mode enables you to restrict the entering of new destinations. When you set <RESTRICT NEW ADD.> to <ON>, the following are restricted: |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Restricting PC Faxing |
You can specify whether or not to allow sending faxes from computers using the fax driver. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Confirming Entered Fax Numbers |
You can specify whether or not to confirm the entered fax numbers each time you send a fax. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<ON>: The confirmation screen appears when you enter a fax number using <OFF>: The confirmation screen does not appear. |
![]() |
|
Checking the Job Log |
You can specify whether or not to check the job log. When you set <CHECKING THE LOG> to <ON>, you can check the job log using the System Monitor screen. When you set <CHECKING THE LOG> to <OFF>, the job log does not appear on the System Monitor screen. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Registering a License |
You must register a license key to enable optional modes and functions. Each optional mode and function requires its own license key to be registered. There is no limit to the number of license keys that can be registered in the machine. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the following screen is displayed, press [OK]. Enter the correct license key. If the screen is displayed again, press [OK] and cancel license registration.
If the messages <INSTALLATION OK> and <TURN POWER OFF/ON> appear, license registration is complete. |
![]() |
|
Restricting the USB Interface Port |
You can restrict jobs through the USB interface. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<ON>: The machine accepts jobs through the USB interface. <OFF>: The machine does not accept jobs through the USB interface. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Introduction of the Machine |
Depending on the system configuration and product purchased, some functions may not be available. |
Available Features |
The procedures described in this manual are based on the imageRUNNER 1025iF. Depending on the system configuration and product purchased, some features described in the manuals may not be available. The table below shows the available features on a product basis. |
The Card Reader-E1, Cassette Feeding Module-N2, and Barcode Printing Kit are available options. |
External View (Front) |
Machine components vary depending on the model you purchased. For information on the standard features and available options for each model, see "Available Features." |
|
|
imageRUNNER 1025 |
|
External View (Back) |
Machine components vary depending on the model you purchased. For information on the standard features and available options for each model, see "Available Features." |
|
Main Operation Panel |
imageRUNNER 1025iF |
imageRUNNER 1025/1025N |
|
Send Operation Panel (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only) |
|
Display Parts and Functions |
Depending on your needs, you can change the standby display which appears when the main power switch is turned on. For details, see "Machine Settings." |
Copy Mode |
Send Mode (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only) |
Scan Mode |
Log In Mode |
Remark |
|
![]() |
|||||
Copy Mode |
|
|
|
Log In Mode |
If the Department ID Management or User ID Management is set, the Log In screen is displayed. For information on the Department ID Management or User ID Management, see "Security."
Enter the Department ID and password, then press [OK] or
Enter the User ID and password, then press [OK] or |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
Entering Characters |
For displays that require alphanumeric entries, follow the procedure below to enter characters. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
Registering Destinations in the Address Book (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only) |
This chapter describes how to register destinations in the Address Book, and how to edit and erase registered information. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
Storing/Editing One-Touch Keys |
Storing/Editing Coded Dial Codes |
Storing/Editing One-Touch Keys |
The Address Book is a feature used for storing fax, e-mail, I-fax, and file server destinations. The Address Book is divided into one-touch keys and coded dial codes. You can store up to 23 destinations in one-touch keys, and 177 destinations in coded dial codes, for a total of 200 destinations in the whole Address Book. You can also register multiple destinations of various types in a group address, and assign a one-touch key or coded dial code to this group. Registering a destination in the Address Book saves you the effort of entering that destination's address each time you send a job. |
Registering Fax Numbers in One-touch Keys |
Registering E-Mail Addresses in One-touch Keys |
Registering I-Fax Addresses in One-touch Keys |
Registering File Server Addresses in One-touch Keys |
Registering Group Addresses in One-touch Keys |
Editing One-Touch Keys |
Editing One-Touch Keys (Group Addresses) |
Erasing One-Touch Keys |
Erasing One-Touch Keys (Group Addresses) |
Registering Fax Numbers in One-touch Keys |
This section describes the procedure for registering fax numbers in the one-touch keys. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can also select a one-touch key by pressing the corresponding one-touch key. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<DOMESTIC>: Normally select this option. <LONG DISTANCE 1-3>: Select one of these options when you make an international call. If errors occur during fax transmissions, try the setting from <LONG DISTANCE 1> through <LONG DISTANCE 3>. To register another one-touch key, repeat the procedure from step 4. |
![]() |
|
Registering E-Mail Addresses in One-touch Keys |
This section describes the procedure for registering e-mail addresses in the one-touch keys. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can also select a one-touch key by pressing the corresponding one-touch key. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Registering I-Fax Addresses in One-touch Keys |
This section describes the procedure for registering I-fax addresses in the one-touch keys. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can also select a one-touch key by pressing the corresponding one-touch key. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Registering File Server Addresses in One-touch Keys |
This section describes the procedure for registering file server addresses in the one-touch keys. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can also select a one-touch key by pressing the corresponding one-touch key. |
![]() |
![]() |
<FTP>: Select this protocol if you are sending documents to a computer running Sun Solaris 2.6 or later, Mac OS X, Internet Information Services 5.0 under Windows 2000 Server, Internet Information Services 5.1 under Windows XP Professional, Internet Information Services 6.0 under Windows 2003 Server, Windows 2008 Server, Internet Information Services 7.0 under Windows Vista, or Red Hat Linux 7.2. <SMB>: Select this protocol if you are sending documents to a computer running UNIX/Linux (Samba 2.2.8a or later), or Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista/Server2008. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If no DNS server is available, the host name setting should be specified using the IP address of the FTP server. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can enter up to 24 characters for the login name. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can enter up to 24 characters (14 characters when <SMB> is selected as the server protocol) for the password. To register another one-touch key, repeat the procedure from step 4. |
![]() |
|
Registering Group Addresses in One-touch Keys |
The Group Address feature enables you to create a group of up to 199 stored destinations as a single destination. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can also select a one-touch key by pressing the corresponding one-touch key. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
To enter a destination stored under a one-touch key, press the desired one-touch key. To enter a destination stored under a coded dial code, press
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
To register another group, repeat the procedure from step 4. Ex. |
![]() |
|
Editing One-Touch Keys |
This section describes the procedure for editing the fax, I-fax, e-mail and file server addresses in the one-touch keys. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can also select a one-touch key by pressing the corresponding one-touch key. |
![]() |
![]() |
You can edit the following items: |
![]() |
![]() |
To delete the entire entry, press and hold |
![]() |
![]() |
For editing the file server address, repeat step 5 to 7 to edit the desired items, then go to step 11. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Editing One-Touch Keys (Group Addresses) |
This section describes the procedure for adding a new destination to the group, deleting a destination from the group, or changing the group name registered in one-touch keys. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
For details about how to add a new destination, see "Adding a New Destination to Group." For details about how to delete a destination from a group, see"Deleting a Destination from Group." For details about how to change the group name, see "Changing a Group Name." |
![]() |
|
Adding a New Destination to Group |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
For details on specifying a destination from Address Book, see "Registering Group Addresses in One-touch Keys." |
![]() |
|
Deleting a Destination from Group |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Changing a Group Name |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
To delete the entire name, press and hold |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Erasing One-Touch Keys |
This section describes the procedure for erasing addresses registered under one-touch buttons. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can also select a one-touch key by pressing the corresponding one-touch key. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Erasing One-Touch Keys (Group Addresses) |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Storing/Editing Coded Dial Codes |
The Address Book is a feature used for storing fax, e-mail, I-fax, and file server destinations. The Address Book is divided into one-touch keys and coded dial codes. You can store up to 23 destinations in one-touch keys, and 177 destinations in coded dial codes, for a total of 200 destinations in the whole Address Book. You can also register multiple destinations of various types in a group address, and assign a one-touch key or coded dial code to this group. Registering a destination in the Address Book saves you the effort of entering that destination's address each time you send a job. |
Registering Fax Numbers in Coded Dial Codes |
Registering E-Mail Addresses in Coded Dial Codes |
Registering I-Fax Addresses in Coded Dial Codes |
Registering File Server Addresses in Coded Dial Codes |
Registering Group Addresses in Coded Dial Codes |
Editing Coded Dial Codes |
Editing Coded Dial Codes (Group Addresses) |
Erasing Coded Dial Codes |
Erasing Coded Dial Codes (Group Addresses) |
Remark |
|
||||||
Registering Fax Numbers in Coded Dial Codes |
This section describes the procedure for registering fax numbers in the coded dial codes. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can also select a coded dial code by pressing |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<DOMESTIC>: Normally select this option. <LONG DISTANCE 1-3>: Select one of these options when you make an international call. If errors occur during fax transmissions, try the setting from <LONG DISTANCE 1> through <LONG DISTANCE 3>. To register another coded dial code repeat the procedure from step 4. |
![]() |
|
Registering E-Mail Addresses in Coded Dial Codes |
This section describes the procedure for registering e-mail addresses in the coded dial codes. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can also select a coded dial code by pressing |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Registering I-Fax Addresses in Coded Dial Codes |
This section describes the procedure for registering I-fax addresses in the coded dial codes. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can also select a coded dial code by pressing |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Registering File Server Addresses in Coded Dial Codes |
This section describes the procedure for registering file server addresses in the coded dial codes. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If a password has been set for the Address Book, use the numeric keys to enter the password, then press [OK]. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can also select a coded dial code by pressing |
![]() |
![]() |
<FTP>: Select this protocol if you are sending documents to a computer running Sun Solaris 2.6 or later, Mac OS X, Internet Information Services 5.0 under Windows 2000 Server, Internet Information Services 5.1 under Windows XP Professional, Internet Information Services 6.0 under Windows 2003 Server, Windows 2008 Server, Internet Information Services 7.0 under Windows Vista, or Red Hat Linux 7.2. <SMB>: Select this protocol if you are sending documents to a computer running UNIX/Linux (Samba 2.2.8a or later), or Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista/Server2008. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If no DNS server is available, the host name setting should be specified using the IP address of the FTP server. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can enter up to 24 characters for the login name. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can enter up to 24 characters (14 characters when <SMB> is selected as the server protocol) for the password. To register another coded dial code, repeat the procedure from step 4. |
![]() |
|
Registering Group Addresses in Coded Dial Codes |
The Group Address feature enables you to create a group of up to 199 stored destinations as a single destination. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can also select a coded dial code by pressing |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
To enter a destination stored under a coded dial code, press
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
To register another group, repeat the procedure from step 4. Ex. |
![]() |
|
Editing Coded Dial Codes |
This section describes the procedure for editing the fax, I-fax, e-mail and file server addresses in coded dial codes. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can also select a coded dial code by pressing |
![]() |
![]() |
You can edit the following items: |
![]() |
![]() |
To delete the entire entry, press and hold |
![]() |
![]() |
For editing the file server address, repeat step 5 to 7 to edit the desired items, then go to step 11. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Editing Coded Dial Codes (Group Addresses) |
This section describes the procedure for adding a new destination to the group, deleting a destination from the group, or changing the group name registered in the coded dial codes. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
For details about how to add a new destination, see "Adding a New Destination to Group." For details about how to delete a destination from a group, see "Deleting a Destination from Group." For details about how to change the group name, see "Changing a Group Name." |
![]() |
|
Adding a New Destination to Group |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
To select a group stored under the coded dial code, press |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Deleting a Destination from Group |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
To select a group stored under the coded dial code, press |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Changing a Group Name |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
To select a group stored under the coded dial code, press |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
To delete the entire name, press and hold |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Erasing Coded Dial Codes |
This section describes the procedure for erasing addresses registered under one-touch buttons. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can also select a coded dial code by pressing |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Erasing Coded Dial Codes (Group Addresses) |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
To select a group stored under the coded dial code, press |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Toner Cartridge |
If a message prompting you to replace the toner cartridge appears on the display, replace the toner cartridge with a new one. |
Maintaining the Toner Cartridge |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
Maintaining the Toner Cartridge |
– The recommended storage conditions are: temperature below 86 °F (30 °C), and humidity below 80%.
|
Genuine Supplies |
Canon has developed and manufactured Toner, Parts, and Supplies specifically for use in this machine. For optimal print quality and for optimal machine performance and productivity, we recommend that you use Genuine Canon Toner, Parts, and Supplies.
Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toners in the marketplace. Use of counterfeit toner may result in poor print quality or machine performance. Canon is not responsible for any malfunction, accident or damage caused by the use of non-genuine Canon toner or counterfeit toner. For more information, see http://www.canon.com/counterfeit. |
On the Platen Glass |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
If your original does not match any of the paper size marks, align the center of your original with the arrow mark. |
![]() |
![]() |
The original is ready for scanning.
|
In the ADF |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
The originals are ready for scanning.
|
In the Paper Drawer |
![]() |
![]() |
If you use LTR size, go to step 4. If you use other sizes, go to step 2. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
In the same manner, load the paper into the optional paper drawer. For attaching the optional paper drawer, see the instruction sheet that comes with the optional paper drawer. For details on loading paper in the stack bypass, see "In the Stack Bypass." |
In the Stack Bypass |
If you are making prints on transparencies, labels, nonstandard size paper, or envelopes, load them into the stack bypass. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
Insert the paper stack as far as it will go. |
![]() |
The screen for selecting the paper size appears.
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
For the Paper Drawer |
The default settings are <PLAIN PAPER> and <LTR>. When you place other types and/or sizes of paper, follow this procedure to change the settings. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can select from the following paper types: <PLAIN PAPER>, <COLOR>, <RECYCLED>, <HEAVY PAPER 1>, <BOND>, <3HOLE PUNCH PAPER> If you use the optional paper drawer, confirm that <DRAWER 2> is displayed and press [OK]. Then repeat this step to set the paper type for <DRAWER 2>. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can select from the following paper sizes: <LTR>, <LGL>, <OFICIO>, <FLSP>, <BRAZIL-OFICIO>, <MEXICO-OFICIO>, <A4> If you use the optional paper drawer, confirm that <DRAWER 2> is displayed and press [OK]. Then repeat this step to set the paper size for <DRAWER 2>. |
![]() |
|
For the Stack Bypass |
You can register a frequently used paper size and type for the stack bypass. The default setting of standard settings for stack bypass is <OFF>. To print using the stack bypass, follow this procedure to specify the paper size and type. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can select from the following paper sizes: <LTR>, <STMTR>, <EXECUTIV>, <OFICIO>, <BRAZIL-OFICIO>, <MEXICO-OFICIO>, <FOLIO>, <G-LTR>, <G-LGL>, <FLSP>, <COM10>*1, <MONARCH>*1, <DL>*1, <ISO-C5>*1, <ISO-B5>*1, <FREESIZE>*2, <A4>, <B5>, <A5R>, <LGL> *1 For envelopes. *2 For non-standard paper size. You can also press [ |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can select from the following paper types: <PLAIN PAPER>, <COLOR>, <RECYCLED>, <HEAVY PAPER 1>, <HEAVY PAPER 2>, <HEAVY PAPER 3>, <BOND>, <3HOLE PUNCH PAPER>, <TRANSPARENCY>, <LABELS>, <ENVELOPE> |
![]() |
|
Setting the Tone Volume |
This section describes how to adjust the tones that the machine sounds during operation or fax transmission. |
Setting the Audible Tones |
Setting the Audible Tones |
The default settings are:
|
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can specify the following audible tones:
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Setting the Date and Time |
This section describes how to set the current date and time, the time zone in which the machine is used, and the daylight saving time. |
Setting the Current Date and Time |
Setting the Time Zone |
Setting the Date Type |
Setting the Sleep Mode |
Setting the Auto Clear Time |
Setting the Daylight Saving Time |
Setting the Current Date and Time |
You can set the current date and time. The current date and time settings are used as standard timer settings for functions that require them. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Setting the Time Zone |
The standard time zones of the world are expressed globally in terms of the difference in hours (± up to 12 hours) from GMT (0 hours). A time zone is a region throughout which this time difference is the same. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
The default setting is 'GMT-5:00'.
|
![]() |
|
Setting the Date Type |
You can select the format of the date to be displayed. The default setting is <MM/DD/YYYY>. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Setting the Sleep Mode |
If the machine remains idle for a certain period of time, it automatically enters the Sleep mode. The default settings are <ON> and <5MIN.>. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can set the interval from 3 to 30 minutes (in one-minute increments). |
![]() |
|
Setting the Auto Clear Time |
If the machine remains idle for a certain period of time, the display returns to the standby mode (Auto Clear function). This section describes how to set the period of time until the display returns to the standby mode. The default setting is <2MIN.>. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can set the interval from 1 to 9 minutes (in one-minute increments). |
![]() |
|
Setting the Daylight Saving Time |
In some countries or are as, time is advanced throughout the summer season. This section describes how to set the Daylight Saving Time. This is called "Daylight Saving Time." The default setting is <OFF>. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Customizing Settings |
You can specify the settings that are common to the Copy, Print, Send, and Fax functions. |
Setting the Initial Function |
Setting the Function after Auto Clear Mode Initiates |
Setting the Toner Save Mode |
Adjusting the Print Density |
Enabling the Inch Entry |
Setting Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer Switching |
Setting the Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode |
Setting the Speed or Print Side Priority |
Changing the Language Shown on the Display |
Returning the Common Settings to Their Defaults |
Setting the Initial Function |
You can select which standby display appears when turning ON the power. The default setting is <COPY> standby screen. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Setting the Function after Auto Clear Mode Initiates |
You can select which standby display appears after the Auto Clearing function is activated. The default setting is <INITIAL FUNCTION>. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Setting the Toner Save Mode |
You can set the toner consumption for printing. The default setting is <OFF>. If the Toner Save mode is set to <ON>, print quality may be affected. If you notice a degradation in print quality, set this mode to <OFF>. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Adjusting the Print Density |
You can adjust the density to the most appropriate level for the document either automatically or manually. |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
Enabling the Inch Entry |
If you set <MM/INCH ENTRY> to <INCH> in <COPY SETTINGS> (from the Additional Functions screen), you can enter values in inches when using the frame erase function. The default entry mode for numeric values is inches, but you can change it to millimeters by turning the Inch Entry mode <MM>. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Setting Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer Switching |
You can set which paper sources can be used for Automatic Paper Selection and Auto Drawer Switching. This setting can be made independently for all functions of the machine, and is especially useful when you want to use different paper sources for different purposes. The default settings are <OFF> for the stack bypass and <ON> for the paper drawers. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Setting the Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode |
You can set the amount of energy that the machine consumes when it is in the Sleep mode. If you set the power consumption to <LOW>, the machine consumes less energy during the Sleep mode than when you set it to <HIGH>. However, it takes more time for the machine to resume normal operation. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Setting the Speed or Print Side Priority |
You can set whether the printer speed is the priority for your job, or whether to print on a specific side of the paper. This is useful when you want to make one or two-sided prints on preprinted paper (paper which has logos or patterns already printed on it) without changing the orientation of the paper loaded in a paper source. The default setting is <SPEED PRIORITY>. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<SPEED PRIORITY>: When you feed one or two-sided prints into the machine, the method for delivering paper inside the machine changes, and this affects the printing speed. Therefore, to maximize the printing speed, load the paper manually as follows:
<PRINT SIDE>: If you load paper in a paper drawer and select <PRINT SIDE>, no matter whether you are printing one or two-sided prints, the side of the paper facing up is always the one printed on first. (The side facing down is the one printed on first for the stack bypass.) facing up. Print speed becomes slower for one-sided print.
|
![]() |
|
Changing the Language Shown on the Display |
You can change the language displayed on the display and printed on reports. The default setting is <ENGLISH>. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can select a language from among: <ENGLISH>, <FRENCH>, <SPANISH>, and <PORTUGUESE> |
![]() |
|
Returning the Common Settings to Their Defaults |
You can restore all of the Common Settings to their defaults. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Summary of Reports and Lists |
The machine prints the following reports and lists.
|
Printing Reports Automatically |
TX REPORT, RX REPORT, and ACTIVITY REPORT can be set to print automatically. |
TX Report |
RX Report |
Activity Report |
TX Report |
This section describes how to set TX reports to print automatically. The default setting is <PRINT ERROR ONLY>. The following items are printed in a TX REPORT:
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<PRINT ERROR ONLY>: Prints a report only when a transmission error occurs. |
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: Does not print the first page. <ON>: Prints the first page. |
![]() |
|
RX Report |
This section describes how to set RX reports to print automatically. The default setting is <OFF>. The following items are printed in an RX REPORT:
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OUTPUT NO>: Does not print a report. |
![]() |
|
Activity Report |
The following items are displayed in the ACTIVITY REPORT:
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OUTPUT YES>: Prints a report after every 40 transactions. <OUTPUT NO>: Does not print a report. Skip to step 9. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: Prints a report with the transmission and reception results listed chronologically. |
![]() |
|
Printing Reports and Lists Manually |
You can print the following lists manually.
|
Printing an Activity Report |
Printing a Speed Dial List |
Printing an Address Book Details List |
Printing a User's Data List |
Printing an Activity Report |
An Activity Report is automatically printed every 40 transactions. Activity Reports can also be printed manually. For information about the Activity Reports and instructions on how to set to print Activity Reports automatically, see "Activity Report." |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
An ACTIVITY REPORT is printed out and the display returns to standby mode. |
Printing a Speed Dial List |
You can print lists of destinations registered in Address Book. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
The selected Speed Dial List is printed out and the display returns to standby mode. |
Printing an Address Book Details List |
You can print detailed lists of Address Book. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
The selected Address Book Details List is printed out and the display returns to standby mode. |
Printing a User's Data List |
A User's Data List enables you to check the machine settings. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
A USER'S DATA LIST is printed out and the display returns to standby mode. |
UFR II LT Printer Driver |
The Canon UFR II LT printer driver enables users of Microsoft Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008, or Windows Vista to print from any Windows application and make full use of their Canon printers. (Although the machines supported by this printer driver have multiple functions, they will be referred to as "printers" in this guide). This machine supports two types of printer drivers: Hewlett-Packard's PCL (Printer Control Language) printer driver including the PCL5c, PCL5e, and PCL6 printer drivers, and Canon's UFRII LT (Ultra Fast Rendering II Lite) printer driver. Using the UFRII LT printer driver, the various data processing tasks conventionally executed within the printer are appropriately divided between the host PC and the printer to greatly reduce the overall printing time. The workload can be delegated to match the output data, thus realizing a significant increase in speed through optimization. You can update your printer driver software and acquire information about Canon products on the Canon home page (http://www.usa.canon.com). Driver software is updated every few months. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
PCL Printer Driver (Optional) |
The Canon PCL5e and PCL6 printer drivers enable users of Microsoft Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008, or Windows Vista to print from any Windows application and make full use of their Canon printers. (Although the machines supported by these printer drivers have multiple functions, they will be referred to as "printers" in this guide.) This machine supports two types of printer drivers: Hewlett-Packard's PCL (Printer Control Language) printer driver including the PCL5c, PCL5e, and PCL6 printer drivers, and Canon's UFRII LT (Ultra Fast Rendering II Lite) printer driver. The PCL5e and PCL6 printer drivers can be used with most kinds of business application software. The PCL5e printer driver is for black-and-white printers, and the PCL6 printer driver is for both color and black-and-white printers. PCL6 is an advanced version of PCL5e, and offers superior printing quality and speed. The PCL5e printer driver is provided as standard with black-and-white printers. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
FAX Driver (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only) |
The fax driver gives users of Microsoft Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008, or Windows Vista (hereafter called Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista) operating system the ability to make full use of the fax function of the printer. If your printer is equipped with the optional fax subsystem, the fax driver enables you to access the fax function. The fax driver is conceptually akin to a printer driver. A user would select [Print] from any Windows application software, select the Canon fax driver as the printer, and specify its destination(s) and options. The fax driver would then convert this into an image that conforms to standard fax protocols, to be printed or stored on the recipient fax machine(s). |
Department/User ID Management |
If Department ID Management is set to <ON> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, you must enter your Department ID and password to be able to operate the machine. |
Procedure before Using the Machine |
Procedure after Using the Machine |
Procedure before Using the Machine |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
The standby display appears. |
Setting Up the Machine |
This chapter describes the settings before using the machine. |
Set Up the Machine to Suit Your Purposes |
Determine which machine functions (Copy, Fax, Scan, PC Print, PC Fax, Remote UI, E-Mail, I-Fax, Scan to File Server) you intend to use, and make the settings according to the flowchart below. |
Set Up the Machine |
Items Included with the Machine |
Install Toner Cartridge |
Install Drum Unit |
Set Up Paper Drawer and Load Paper |
Connect Power Cord and Turn ON the Machine |
Set Date and Time |
Items Included with the Machine |
*1 imageRUNNER 1025iF only
|
Install Toner Cartridge |
This section describes the installation procedure for the toner cartridge.
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
Install Drum Unit |
This section describes the installation procedure for the drum unit. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
Set Up Paper Drawer and Load Paper |
![]() |
![]() |
If you use LTR size, go to step 4. If you use other sizes, go to step 2.
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
Connect the Power Cord and Turn ON the Machine |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Remark |
|
|
|||||
Set Date and Time |
Before using the machine, you MUST set the current date and time. The date and time set are used as a standard for timer settings functions.
|
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
Enter the month, day and year using two digits (including zeros).
|
![]() |
|
Make Fax Settings (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only) |
This section describes how to make the fax settings. If you are using the imageRUNNER1025/1025N, skip the procedure described in this section and got to "Set Up the Network Connection". |
Connect Telephone Cables |
Register User Telephone Number and Unit Name |
Select the Receive Mode that Suits Your Needs |
Connect Telephone Cables |
If you want to connect your own external telephone or telephone with built-in answering machine, connect the cable to the external device jack (B) on the back side of the machine. |
Register User Telephone Number and Unit Name |
This section describes the procedure for registering the user telephone number and unit name. For instructions for entering information, refer to "Information About the Keys" below. |
Use the keys shown below to enter information in the machine. You can enter the following characters in each input mode:
|
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Before sending documents, you MUST register your fax number, unit name, and the current date and time in the machine. The sender information you register in the machine appears in the header of each page received by your recipient. |
Select the Receive Mode that Suits Your Needs |
Receives faxes automatically. When you use only the fax function, select this mode without connecting an external telephone.
Automatically switches between fax calls and voice calls. The machine receives faxes automatically and it rings for voice calls.
Receives faxes automatically and routes voice calls to the telephone with built-in answering machine.
Rings for every call, whether it is a fax call or a voice call. For a fax call, you have to manually activate the machine to receive the fax.
The receive mode determines how the machine responds to incoming faxes and voice calls. Select the mode that most suits your needs from the chart below. For more information about the receive modes, see "About the Receive Modes."
|
|
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
By default, the telephone line type on the machine is set to tone dialing. If you use tone dialing, skip the following procedure. If you use pulse dialing, follow the procedure below and change the telephone line type setting on the machine to the pulse dialing. |
|
|
|
|
|
<TOUCH TONE>: Tone dialing (default) <ROTARY PULSE>: Pulse dialing |
|
Set Up the Network Connection |
This section describes setting the network connection. If you are using the imageRUNNER1025 without optional network board installed, skip the procedure described in this section. |
Connect the LAN Cable |
Set Up the Network Connection |
Specify the IP Address Settings |
Connect the LAN Cable |
|
A category 5 or greater twisted pair LAN cable is compatible with the machine. Connect one end to the 10Base-T/100Base-TX port on the back of the machine and the other end to a network router or a hub.
|
Set Up the Network Connection |
To use the machine connected to a network, you must set up the IP address.
The following flow chart indicates the settings needed for each function. |
Specify the IP Address Settings |
An IP address must be specified in order to enable communication between the machine and computer. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
Automatic Setting |
Check IP Address Setting |
Manual Setting |
Automatic Setting |
By default, the IP address is assigned to the machine automatically by the DHCP server. Therefore, all you have to do when using DHCP is just to connect the network cable. After connecting the LAN cable, wait for 30 seconds until the machine obtains the IP address. |
Remark |
|
||||||
Check IP Address Setting |
To confirm IP address settings, follow the procedure below. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
If the machine is communicating with the network properly, the IP address, subnet mask and gateway address are displayed.
|
![]() |
|
Manual Setting |
This is for the setting for the static IP address. If the machine obtains an IP address automatically in "Automatic Setting," skip this procedure. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Set Up Computers and Software |
Connection between a Computer and the Machine |
About User Software CD-ROM |
Network Connection |
USB Connection |
Connection between a Computer and the Machine |
There are two ways to connect the machine and computers: USB connection and network connection. |
|
The following functions are available with network connection: PC Print, Remote UI, PC Fax, E-Mail/I-Fax, Scan to File Server. |
|
The following functions are available with USB connection: Scan document from a computer, PC Print, PC Fax.
System Requirements
|
About User Software CD-ROM |
The User Software CD-ROM consists of the following Drivers and Software. |
Using the UFRII LT Driver, the data processing tasks conventionally executed within the printer are appropriately divided between the host computer and the printer to greatly reduce the overall printing time. The workload can be delegated to match the output data, thus realizing a significant increase in speed through optimization.
The Fax Driver is conceptually akin to a printer driver. A user selects [Print] from any Windows application software, selects the Canon Fax Driver as the printer, and specifies its destination(s) and options. The Fax Driver then converts this into an image that conforms to standard fax protocols, to be printed or stored on the recipient fax machine(s).
This is the Hewlett-Packard's PCL printer driver, which includes the PCL5c, PCL5e, and PCL6 drivers. The PCL5c printer driver is for color printers, while the PCL5e and PCL6 printer drivers are for black-and-white printers. PCL6 is an advanced version of PCL5e and offers superior printing quality and speed. This machine supports the PCL5e and PCL6 printer drivers.
Scanner Driver enables computer to use the machine as scanner.
iR Toolbox is a program that allows you to easily import images scanned with a scanner into an application, attach them to e-mail messages, save them to the computer, etc. * Only for the imageRUNNER 1025iF.
The NetSpot Device Installer enables you to set up the machine for network operations.
Font Manager is a comprehensive program that helps you manage your fonts in Microsoft Windows.
30 barcode scalable fonts are included. * Comes with the PCL printer driver. For the installation procedure, refer to the following.
|
Network Connection |
Remark |
|
![]() |
|
||||
Connect the machine to the network correctly, and confirm that the power is ON. |
![]() |
Insert the User Software CD-ROM to the computer. |
Click [Installation] to install the driver software.
If the CD-ROM Setup screen is not displayed, click [start] on the Windows task bar → [My Computer]. |
![]() |
Click [Next] under [Connect Printer to Computer via Network]. If you are installing the software on a computer running Windows Server 2003/Server 2008, the screen for this step is not displayed. |
Click [Install]. |
![]() |
Read License Agreement carefully and click [Yes]. |
Click [Next].
|
![]() |
Select your machine on the list, then click [Next]. Make sure that the machine name is highlighted. |
Click the drivers you want to install, then click [Next]. Select [Printer] and [Fax], if you use imageRUNNER1025iF.
|
![]() |
Verify the appropriate printer name is displayed and click [Next]. Repeat this step for each driver that you have selected.
|
Click [Next]. |
![]() |
Click [Start]. |
Verify that the printer you want to set as a default printer is selected and click [Next]. |
![]() |
If you want to print out a test page, check the printer name and click [Next]. A printer test page is printed out from the machine.
|
Click [Exit]. |
![]() |
Click [Next]. |
Click [Restart Computer Now (Recommended)], then Click [Restart]. |
![]() |
Remove the User Software CD-ROM from the computer.
|
Verify that the driver has been installed successfully and that the machine has been set as the default printer.
|
Windows XP/Server 2003: From the Windows task bar, click [start] → select [Printers and Faxes]. |
Right-click the printer icon for this machine → Select [Set as Default Printer] from the [File] menu. |
USB Connection |
Remark |
|
![]() |
|||||
Insert the User Software CD-ROM to the computer. |
![]() |
Click [Installation] to install the driver software.
If the CD-ROM Setup screen is not displayed, click [start] on the Windows task bar → [My Computer]. |
Click [Next] under [Connect Printer Directly to Computer]. |
![]() |
Verify the necessary drivers are selected and click [Install].
|
Read License Agreement carefully and click [Yes]. |
![]() |
Click [Next] on the iR Drivers - Setup Wizard screen. |
Click [Exit]. iR Driver is installed. |
![]() |
Click [Next] on the iR Toolbox - Setup Wizard screen. |
Click [Next] to proceed to the next step. |
![]() |
Click [Next]. |
Click [Start]. |
![]() |
Click [Exit]. iR Toolbox is installed. |
Click [next]. |
![]() |
Click [Restart Computer Now (Recommended)], then Click [Restart]. |
Attach the ferrite core (A) as close as possible to the B-type side (square) of the USB cable (B). (imageRUNNER 1025N/1025iF only) |
![]() |
After restarting your computer, connect the machine and your computer with a USB cable (A).
|
Remove the User Software CD-ROM from the computer. |
![]() |
Verify that the driver has been installed successfully and that the machine has been set as the default printer.
|
Windows XP: From the Windows task bar, click [start (Start)] → select [Printers and Faxes]. |
Right-click the printer icon for this machine. Click [Set as Default Printer] from the [File] menu. |
Windows XP: From the Windows task bar, click [start] → select [Control Panel] → [Printers and Other Hardware] → [Scanners and Cameras]. |
If the [Canon iR Toolbox 4.9] icon is displayed on the Windows desktop, installation of the iR Toolbox 4.9 has been successful. |
How to Use This Manual |
This category describes how to use this manual. |
User Manual CD-ROM (e-Manual) |
The User Manual CD-ROM (e-Manual) is software that enables you to select and view HTML Manuals included on the CD-ROM via your computer screen. Follow the instructions below to use the User Manual CD-ROM (e-Manual). |
System Requirements |
Using the User Manual CD-ROM (e-Manual) |
Symbols Used in This Manual |
Illustrations Used in This Manual |
System Requirements |
The User Manual CD-ROM (e-Manual) can be used in the following system environments.
|
Remark |
|
|
|||||
Using the User Manual CD-ROM (e-Manual) |
When using the e-Manual with Windows, follow the steps below.
1. Insert the User Manual CD-ROM on your computer.
1. Insert the User Manual CD-ROM on your computer. When using the e-Manual with Macintosh, follow the steps below.
When you start the e-Manual, the screen below is displayed.
|
|
|
Remark |
|
|
|||||
Symbols Used in This Manual |
The following symbols are used in this manual to explain procedures, restrictions, handling precautions, and instructions that should be observed for safety.
|
Illustrations Used in This Manual |
Unless otherwise mentioned, illustrations used in this manual are those taken when no optional equipment is attached to the imageRUNNER 1025iF. If there is any difference between the imageRUNNER 1025, 1025N or 1025iF, it is clearly indicated in the text, for instance "imageRUNNER 1025iF Only." |
Troubleshooting |
This chapter explains how to respond to paper and original jams, as well as to error messages. |
Error Codes (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only) |
An error code is a four-digit code shown on an ERROR TX REPORT or an ERROR RX REPORT when an error occurs. For details on reports, see "Summary of Reports and Lists." See the table below for individual error codes. |
![]() |
Description | |
Action | |
![]() |
Description1 | |
Action | |
Description2 | |
Action | |
Description3 | |
Action | |
![]() |
Description1 | |
Action |
Description2 | |
Action | |
![]() |
Description | |
Action | |
![]() |
Description | |
Action | |
![]() |
Description | |
Action | |
![]() |
Description | |
Action | |
![]() |
Description | |
Action1 | |
Action2 | |
![]() |
Description | |
Action1 | |
Action2 | |
Action3 | |
Action4 | |
![]() |
Description | |
Action1 | |
Action2 | |
![]() |
Description1 | |
Action1 | |
Description2 | |
Action2 | |
Description3 | |
Action3 | |
![]() |
Description | |
Action | |
![]() |
Description1 | |
Action |
Description2 | |
Action |
Description3 | |
Action | |
![]() |
Description1 | |
Action1 |
Description2 | |
Action2 |
![]() |
Description1 | |
Action1 | |
Description2 | |
Action2 | |
Description3 | |
Action3 | |
![]() |
Description | |
Action | |
![]() |
Description1 | |
Action |
Description2 | |
Action | |
![]() |
Description1 | |
Action1 | |
Action2 |
Description2 | |
Action1 | |
Action2 | |
Action3 | |
Action4 | |
![]() |
Description1 | |
Action | |
Description2 | |
Action | |
Description3 | |
Action | |
![]() |
Description | |
Action | |
![]() |
Description | |
Action | |
![]() |
Description | |
Action | |
![]() |
Description | |
Action | |
![]() |
Description | |
Action | |
![]() |
Description | |
Action | |
![]() |
Description | |
Action | |
![]() |
Description | |
Action | |
![]() |
Description | |
Action | |
If a Power Failure Occurs |
If power is suddenly lost due to an outage or accidental unplugging, a built-in battery retains the user data settings and the Address Book settings. Any sent or received documents stored in memory are backed up for about 60 minutes. During a power outage, functions are limited as follows:
|
Service Call Message |
If a malfunction occurs and the machine cannot operate normally, one of the following service call messages may appear on the display. If this occur, write down the service call message displayed, turn OFF the main power switch, and contact your local authorized Canon dealer. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Follow the procedure below to solve the problem. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
– Turn OFF the main power. – Disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet.
|
Clearing Jams |
When a jam occurs in the machine, the paper jam message appears on the display. Check the jam location indicator where the jam occurs, then remove the jammed paper. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
Originals Jams |
Paper Jams |
Originals Jams |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
Paper Jams |
When <PAPER JAM> appears on the display, remove jammed paper from inside the machine first, then from the paper drawer if necessary. Check the following if you experience repeated paper jams:
|
Stack Bypass |
Inside the Machine and Paper Drawers |
Stack Bypass |
When <PAPER JAM> appears on the display, remove the jammed paper from the stack bypass. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
Inside the Machine and Paper Drawers |
When <PAPER JAM> appears on the display, remove jammed paper from inside the machine first, then from the paper drawer if necessary. Check the following if you experience repeated paper jams:
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
If <CHANGE PAPERSIZE> is Displayed |
When <CHANGE PAPERSIZE> appears on the display, the size of the paper in the paper drawer or stack bypass is different from that of the paper specified in <DRAWER 1>, <DRAWER 2>* of <REG. PAPER SIZE>, or <PAPER SIZE> of <BYPASS STD SET>. You need to load the correct size paper or change the paper size in <DRAWER 1>, <DRAWER 2>* of <REG. PAPER SIZE>, or <PAPER SIZE> of <BYPASS STD SET> in <COMMON SETTINGS>. * Only when the optional Cassette Feeding Module-N2 is attached. |
Remark |
|
||||||
Reloading the Paper |
Changing the Paper Size Setting |
For the Paper Drawer |
For the Stack Bypass |
Reloading the Paper |
![]() |
The machine restarts printing. |
For the Paper Drawer |
Follow this procedure to change the paper size setting. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
* Only when the optional Cassette Feeding Module-N2 is attached. You can select from the following paper sizes: <LTR>, <LGL>, <OFICIO>, <FLSP>, <BRAZIL-OFICIO>, <MEXICO-OFICIO>, <A4> |
![]() |
|
For the Stack Bypass |
If you set the standard settings for stack bypass, follow the procedures below to change paper size. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
You can select from the following paper sizes: <LTR>, <STMTR>, <EXECUTIV>, <OFICIO>, <BRAZIL-OFICIO>, <MEXICO-OFICIO>, <FOLIO>, <G-LTR>, <G-LGL>, <FLSP>, <COM10>, <MONARCH>, <DL>, <ISO-C5>, <ISO-B5>, <FREESIZE>, <A4>, <B5>, <A5R>, <LGL> |
![]() |
|
Error Messages |
Error Messages <A to E> |
Error Messages <F to J> |
Error Messages <K to O> |
Error Messages <P to Z > |
Error Messages <A to E> |
Description | |
Action | |
Description | |
Action | |
Description | |
Action1 | |
Action2 | |
Description1 | |
Action1 | |
Description2 | |
Action2 | |
Description | |
Action | |
Description | |
Action | |
Description | |
Action | |
Description | |
Action1 | |
Action2 | |
Description | |
Action | |
Error Messages <K to O> |
Description | |
Action | |
Description | |
Action | |
Description1 | |
Action1 | |
Action2 | |
Action3 | |
Action4 | |
Description2 | |
Action2 | |
Description | |
Action | |
Description1 | |
Action1 | |
Description2 | |
Action2 | |
Description | |
Action | |
Description1 | |
Action1 | |
Description2 | |
Action2 | |
Description | |
Action | |
Error Messages <P to Z> |
Description | |
Action | |
Description | |
Action | |
Description | |
Action | |
Description1 | |
Action1 | |
Description2 | |
Action2 | |
Description | |
Action | |
Description | |
Action | |
Description | |
Action | |
Description | |
Action | |
Description | |
Action | |
Troubleshooting |
General Problems |
Paper Feeding Problems |
Sending/Receiving Problems |
Copying Problems |
Printing Problems |
Scanning Problems |
Telephone Problems |
Network Problems |
Installing and Uninstalling Problems |
Uninstalling Software |
If the printer driver or fax driver become unnecessary, follow the procedure below to uninstall them. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
Maintenance |
This category describes how to perform routine cleaning operations, and replace toner cartridge. |
Cleaning the Machine |
If the original is not copied clearly, clean the machine. For high-quality printouts, we recommend cleaning the machine once or twice a month. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
Exterior |
Interior |
Scanning Area |
Exterior |
|
|
|
|
Interior |
Clean the machine's print area periodically to prevent toner powder and paper dust from accumulating inside. |
Fuser Roller |
Transcription Roller |
Drum Unit |
Fuser Roller |
If black streaks appear with printing, the fuser roller in the main unit may be dirty. Should this occur, clean the fuser roller in the following procedure. The roller should also be cleaned each time the toner cartridge is replaced. Load a sheet of blank LTR paper into the stack bypass and start cleaning. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
Cleaning starts. When finished, the display returns to the standby mode.
|
Transcription Roller |
If the back of the paper is smudged after printing, the transcription roller may be dirty. Clean the transcription roller in the following procedure. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
Cleaning starts. When finished, the display returns to the standby mode. |
Drum Unit |
If print quality decreases, the drum in the main unit may be dirty. Should this occur, use the Drum Cleaning function to clean the drum. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
Cleaning starts. When finished, the display returns to the standby mode. |
Scanning Area |
Keep the scanning area clean to avoid dirty copies or faxes to be sent. |
Cleaning the Platen Glass |
Cleaning the ADF |
Cleaning the ADF Automatically |
Cleaning the Platen Glass |
Clean the platen glass and the underside of the ADF in the following procedure. |
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
Cleaning the ADF |
If your documents have black streaks or appear dirty after copying them using the ADF, this may be caused by pencil lead rubbing off the documents and onto the roller. Clean the ADF scanning area, film, and roller. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Cleaning the ADF Automatically |
If your documents have black streaks or appear dirty after scanning them through the ADF, clean the ADF roller by repeatedly feeding blank sheets of paper through it. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
ADF cleaning starts. When finished, the display returns to the standby mode. |
Replacing the Toner Cartridge |
When toner runs out completely and prints can no longer be made, the message <OUT OF TONER/CHANGE TONER> appears on the display. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
Replacing the Drum Unit |
When the message <REPLACE THE DRUM> appears on the display, replace the drum unit. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
Adjusting the Machine |
This section describes the settings to improve the print quality and prevent paper jams which may occur when a variety of functions are used. Use of these settings will help to prevent a number of problems before they occur. |
Adjusting Print Quality (SPECIAL MODE M) |
Reducing Paper Curl (SPECIAL MODE N) |
Adjusting Print Density (SPECIAL MODE P) |
Adjusting the Waiting Time for Next Printing (SPECIAL MODE S) |
Adjusting Print Quality during Continuous Printing |
Reducing the Paper Smudge |
Adjusting Toner Fixing for Large-Sized Paper |
Adjusting Feeder Smudge |
Adjusting Print Quality (SPECIAL MODE M) |
If print quality decreases, the transcription output may not work adequately. Use Special Mode M to improve the print quality. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
Details of each item are shown below. <MID>:In normal circumstances, use the default setting. Outputs can be printed by the normal density. <LOW>:Compensate for poor print quality that occurs when using paper that was stored for a long period of time at high temperature and high humidity. <HIGH>:Compensate for poor quality that occurs when using heavyweight paper. |
![]() |
|
Reducing Paper Curl (SPECIAL MODE N) |
When the two-sided printing function is used, paper may curl severely. Use Special Mode N to prevent paper curling. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: The machine does not prevent paper curl. <ON>: The machine prevents paper curl. |
![]() |
|
Adjusting Print Density (SPECIAL MODE P) |
When you use lightweight paper for printing, set this function to 'ON'. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: The machine does not prevent from getting uneven print density. <ON>: The machine prevents from getting uneven print density. |
![]() |
|
Adjusting the Waiting Time for Next Printing (SPECIAL MODE S) |
When you are in a hurry for printing, you can reduce the waiting time to start the next set of printout by using Special Mode S. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: The machine does not reduce the waiting time to start the next set of printout. <SPEED PRIORITY>: The machine reduces the waiting time to start the next set of printout. |
![]() |
|
Adjusting Print Quality during Continuous Printing |
Set whether to prevent the back edge of the previous page from appearing on the following page during continuous printing of half-tone prints or photographs. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: The machine does not prevent the back edge of the previous page from appearing on the following page. <ON>: The machine prevents the back edge of the previous page from appearing on the following page. |
![]() |
|
Reducing the Paper Smudge |
Set whether to prevent the back edge of paper from smudging. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: The machine does not prevent the back edge of paper from smudging. <ON>: The machine prevents the back edge of paper from smudging. |
![]() |
|
Adjusting Toner Fixing for Large-Sized Paper |
Set whether to improve toner fix on large-sized paper. |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: The machine does not improve toner fix on large-sized paper. <ON>: The machine prevents toner fix on large-sized paper. |
![]() |
|
Adjusting Feeder Smudge |
If the ADF is dirty, dots or lines may appear on copies or prints. The Auto Adjustment for Dirty Feeder mode prevents dirt and grime in the ADF from appearing on your prints and copies. |
Remark |
|
|
|||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<OFF>: The machine does not prevent dirt and grime in the feeder from appearing on prints and copies. |
![]() |
|
Transporting the Machine |
Follow this procedure to avoid vibration damage to the machine when transporting it over a long distance. |
Remark |
|
||||||
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
Specifications |
Remark |
|
||||||
General |
General | |
|
Personal Desktop |
|
120 V-127 V, 60 Hz (Power requirements differ depending on the country in which you purchased the product.) |
|
Approx. 0.98kW (maximum) |
|
imageRUNNER 1025/1025N: Less than 16 seconds* imageRUNNER 1025iF: Less than 19 seconds* (temperature: 68°F (20°C), humidity: 65%; from when the machine turns ON the power main switch until the standby display appears) * Warm-up time may differ depending on the condition and environment of the machine. |
|
imageRUNNER 1025: Approx. 48.5 lb (22.0 kg) (including drum unit/excluding toner cartridge) imageRUNNER 1025N/1025iF: Approx. 53.1 lb (24.1 kg) (including drum unit/excluding toner cartridge) |
|
imageRUNNER 1025: 14 7/8" (H) x 18" (D) x 20 1/2" (W) (378 mm (H) x 457 mm (D) x 520 mm (W)) 19 7/8" (H) x 18" (D) x 20 1/2" (W) (506 mm (H) x 457 mm (D) x 520 mm (W)) (with optional paper drawer) imageRUNNER 1025N/1025iF: 17 7/8" (H) x 18" (D) x 20 1/2" (W) (453 mm (H) x 457 mm (D) x 520 mm (W)) 22 7/8" (H) x 18" (D) x 20 1/2" (W) (581 mm (H) x 457 mm (D) x 520 mm (W)) (with optional paper drawer) |
|
38 3/4" (D) x 44" (W) (984 mm (D) x 1,117 mm (W)) (including optional card reader) |
|
Temperature: 59°F–86°F (15°C–30°C) Humidity: 10%–80% RH |
|
ENGLISH/FRENCH/SPANISH/PORTUGUESE |
|
→ Originals Requirements |
|
→ Paper Requirements |
|
→ Printable Area |
|
→ Scanning Area |
Copier |
Copier | |
|
600 dpi x 600 dpi |
|
1200 dpi enhanced x 600 dpi |
|
1:1 ±1.0%, 1:2.000, 1:1.290, 1:0.780, 1:0.640, 1:0.500 Zoom 0.500 - 2.000, 1% increments |
|
Platen glass: less than 8 seconds (LTR) ADF: less than 12 seconds (LTR) |
|
Paper drawer: LTR 25 cpm (Direct) Stack bypass: LTR 24 cpm (Direct) |
|
99 copies maximum |
Printer |
Printer | |
|
Indirect electrostatic method (On-demand fixing) |
|
|
|
100 sheets (17 to 21 lb bond (64 to 80g/m2)) |
|
→ Copy Speed |
|
1200 dpi enhanced x 600 dpi |
|
256 |
|
→ Toner Cartridge |
Scanner |
Scanner | |
|
Color scanner |
|
8 1/2" x 14" (216 mm x 356 mm) |
|
25–9600 dpi (ScanGear iR) |
|
Color: 2.56 msec/line (600 dpi) Grayscale: 2.56 msec/line (600 dpi) |
|
USB 1.1, USB 2.0 |
|
Windows 2000 Professional/XP/Vista |
|
TWAIN and WIA (Windows XP/Windows Vista only) compliant |
Facsimile (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only) |
Facsimile | |
|
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)*1 |
|
G3 |
|
MH, MR, MMR, JBIG |
|
33.6 Kbps Automatic fallback |
|
Approx. 3 seconds/page*2 at 33.6 Kbps, ECM-JBIG, transmitting from memory |
|
FINE: 203 pels/in. x 196 lines/in. (8 pels/mm x 7.7 lines/mm) PHOTO: 203 pels/in. x 196 lines/in. (8 pels/mm x 7.7 lines/mm) SUPER FINE: 203 pels/in. x 392 lines/in. (8 pels/mm x 15.4 lines/mm) ULTRA FINE: 406 pels/in. x 392 lines/in. (16 pels/mm x 15.4 lines/mm) STANDARD: 203 pels/in. x 98 lines/in. (8 pels/mm x 3.85 lines/mm) |
|
|
*1 | The Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) currently supports 28.8 Kbps modem speed or lower, depending on telephone line conditions. |
*2 | Based on ITU-T Standard Chart No. 1, JBIG standard mode. |
Telephone (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only) |
Telephone | |
|
|
Send (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only) |
Send | |
Send to file server | |
|
FTP (TCP/IP), SMB (TCP/IP) |
|
TIFF (B&W), PDF (B&W), JPEG (Color), PDF (Compact) (Color) |
|
100 x 100 dpi, 150 x 150 dpi, 200 x 100 dpi, 200 x 200 dpi, 200 x 400 dpi, 300 x300 dpi, 400 x 400 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi |
|
Windows XP Professional/Home Edition, Windows 2000 Server/Professional (SP1 or later), Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008, Solaris Version 2.6 or later, Mac OS X, Red Hat Linux 7.2 |
|
USB 2.0, 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T |
|
Color, B&W (black and white) |
|
Text, Text/Photo, Photo |
E-mail and I-Fax Features*1 | |
|
SMTP, POP3, I-FAX (Simple mode) |
|
For Sending E-mail: 100 x 100 dpi, 150 x 150 dpi, 200 x 100 dpi, 200 x 200 dpi, 200 x 400 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi, 400 x 400 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi For Sending I-Fax: 200 x 100 dpi, 200 x 200 dpi |
|
E-mail: TIFF (B&W), PDF (B&W), JPEG (Color),
PDF (Compact) (Color) I-Fax: TIFF (MH) |
|
E-mail: LTR, LGL, STMTR, STMT, A4, A5, A5R, B5 I-Fax: LTR, LGL*2, STMTR*2, STMT*2, A4*2, A5*2, A5R*2, B5*2 |
|
Microsoft Exchange Server 5.5 (SP2), Sendmail 8.11.2, Lotus Domino R4.5/R5 |
*1 | Only the B&W mode is available for sending and receiving I-fax documents. |
*2 | Sent as LTR |
Cassette Feeding Module-N2 (Optional) |
Cassette Feeding Module-N2 (Optional) | |
|
500 sheets x 1 drawer (21 lb bond (80 g/m2)) |
|
→ Paper Requirements |
|
From the main unit |
|
6 1/4" (H) x 17 3/8" (D) x 20 1/2" (W) (158 mm (H) x 440 mm (D) x 520 mm (W)) |
|
Approx. 11.46 lb (5.2 kg) |
Card Reader-E1 (Optional) |
Card Reader-E1 (Optional) | |
|
Magnetic type card, Optical type card |
|
Magnetic/Optical readout |
|
Inserting Direction |
|
Replay |
|
From the main unit |
|
1 1/4" (H) x 4" (D) x 3 1/2" (W) (32 mm (H) x 100 mm (D) x 88 mm (W)) |
|
Approx. 5/8 lb (295 g) |
Originals Requirements |
Platen Glass | ADF | |
Type | Plain paper Thick originals Photographs Small originals (e.g., index cards) Special types of paper (e.g., tracing paper*1, transparencies*1, etc.) Book (Depth: max. 7/8" (20 mm)) |
Plain paper (Multiple pages of originals of the same size, thickness and weight or one-page originals.) |
Size (W x L) | 8 1/2" x 14" maximum (216 mm x 356 mm maximum) |
8 1/2" x 14" maximum (216 x 356 mm maximum) 5 1/2" x 5" minimum (139.7 x 128 mm minimum) |
Weight | 4.4 lb (2 kg) maximum | One-sided scanning (1 page): 13 to 34 lb bond (50 to 128 g/m2) Two-sided scanning: 13 to 28 lb bond (50 to 105 g/m2) |
Quantity | 1 sheet | 50 sheets maximum*2 (25 sheets maximum for LGL originals) |
*1 | When copying transparent originals such as tracing paper or transparencies, use a piece of plain white paper to cover the original after placing it face-down on the platen glass. |
*2 | 21 lb bond (80 g/m2) paper |
|
Scanning Area |
Make sure your original's text and graphics fall within the shaded area in the following diagram. Note that the margin widths listed are approximate and there may be slight variations in actual use. |
Paper Requirements |
Paper drawer(s) | Stack bypass | ||
Size (W x L) | LGL, LTR, OFICIO, FLSP, BRAZIL-OFICIO, MEXICO-OFICIO, A4 | 3" x 5" to Legal (8 1/2" x 14") (76 x 127 to 216 x 356 mm) |
|
Weight | 17 to 24 lb bond (64 to 90 g/m2) |
15 to 34 lb bond (56 to 128 g/m2) |
|
Quantity | 500 sheets maximum*1 | 100 sheets maximum*1 | |
Type | Plain *2 | ○ | ○ |
Color *2 | ○ | ○ | |
Recycled *2 | ○ | ○ | |
Heavy 1 *3 | ○ | ○ | |
Heavy 2 *4 | - | ○ | |
Heavy 3 *5 | - | ○ | |
Bond *6 | ○ | ○ | |
3hole punch paper *7 | ○ | ○ | |
Transparency *8 | - | ○ | |
Labels | - | ○ | |
Envelopes | - | ○ |
(○: available -: not available) | |||
*1 | 21 lb bond (80 g/m2) paper | ||
*2 | From 17 to 21 lb bond (64 to 80 g/m2) | ||
*3 | From 22 to 24 lb bond (81 to 90 g/m2) | ||
*4 | From 24 to 28 lb bond (91 to 105 g/m2) | ||
*5 | From 28 to 34 lb bond (106 to 128 g/m2) | ||
*6 | 20 lb bond (75 g/m2) | ||
*7 | LTR size only | ||
*8 | Use only LTR transparencies made especially for this machine. |
Remark |
|
||||||
|
Printable Area |
The shaded area indicates the approximate printable area of LTR paper. Note that the margin widths listed are approximate and there may be slight variations in actual use.
|
Machine Settings |
You can adjust the machine settings from the Setting Menu to customize the way the machine works. To see the list of current settings, print out USER DATA LIST. |
Printing USER DATA LIST |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
Accessing the Setting Menu |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
<COMMON SETTINGS>, <COPY SETTINGS>, <TX/RX SETTINGS>, <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>, <PRINTER SETTINGS>, <TIMER SETTINGS>, <ADJUST./CLEANING>, <REPORT SETTINGS>, <SYSTEM SETTINGS>
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
![]() |
|
![]() |
|
Settings Menu |
The menus described in this section are based on the imageRUNNER 1025iF. Depending on the model of your machine, some settings may not be available and the number on the top of each menu may vary. |
COMMON SETTINGS |
COPY SETTINGS |
TX/RX SETTINGS (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only) |
ADDRESS BOOK SET. (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only) |
PRINTER SETTINGS |
TIMER SETTINGS |
ADJUST./CLEANING |
REPORT SETTINGS |
SYSTEM SETTINGS |
COMMON SETTINGS |
Setting Item | Description | Applicable Page |
1. DEFAULT SETTINGS | Selects which standby display appears when turning on the power.
|
Setting the Initial Function |
2. AUTO CLEAR SET. | Selects which standby display appears after the Auto Clearing function is activated. | Setting the Function after Auto Clear Mode Initiates |
INITIAL FUNCTION |
Sets to return standby display that is selected in <DEFAULT SETTINGS>. | |
SELECTED FUNCTION |
Sets to return standby display of the current mode. | |
3. AUDIBLE TONES | Sets whether to sound audible tones and adjusts their volume. | Setting the Audible Tones |
1. ENTRY TONE |
Beeps when pressing the keys on the operation panel.
|
|
2. ERROR TONE |
Beeps when an error (e.g., paper jam) occurs.
|
|
3. TX JOB DONE TONE |
Beeps when an error (e.g., a paper jam) occurs.
|
|
4. RX JOB DONE TONE |
Beeps when a document is received.
|
|
5. SCAN DONE TONE |
Beeps when scanning is completed.
|
|
6. PRINT DONE TONE |
Beeps when printing is completed.
|
|
4. TONER SAVER MODE | Sets whether to reduce toner consumption.
|
Setting the Toner Save Mode |
5. PRINTER DENSITY | Recalibrates the density adjustment scale if differences between the image in the document and the print occur. (1-9) | Adjusting the Print Density |
6. AUTO DRAWER SELCT | Sets whether to change to another paper source of the same size if the current paper source runs out while processing a job. Sets whether to select the appropriate paper source based on the original's size and copy ratio settings (when making a copy), or the set ratio of the image (when receiving a fax). | Setting Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer Switching |
1. COPY |
Sets whether to activate the Auto Drawer Select function when copying.
|
|
2. PRINTER |
Sets whether to activate the Auto Drawer Select function when printing.
|
|
3. RECEIVE |
Sets whether to activate the Auto Drawer Select function when receiving fax/I-fax documents.
|
|
4. OTHER |
Sets whether to activate the Auto Drawer Select function when printing a report or list.
|
|
7. SELECT PAPER TYPE | Sets the paper type for the paper drawer. | For the Paper Drawer |
1. DRAWER 1 |
Sets the paper type for paper drawer 1. | |
2. DRAWER 2*2 |
Sets the paper type for paper drawer 2. | |
8. REG. PAPER SIZE | Sets the paper size for the paper drawer. | For the Paper Drawer |
1. DRAWER 1 |
Sets the paper size for paper drawer 1. | |
2. DRAWER 2*2 |
Sets the paper size for paper drawer 2. | |
9. ENERGY IN SLEEP | Selects power consumption when the machine is in the Sleep mode between two levels.
|
Setting the Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode |
10.BYPASS STD SET | Sets the standard paper size and type for the stack bypass if you always use a same kind of paper. | For the Stack Bypass |
OFF |
Deactivates the stack bypass standard settings. | |
ON |
Activates the stack bypass standard settings. | |
1. PAPER SIZE |
Sets paper size as the stack bypass standard. | |
2. SELECT PAPER TYPE |
Sets paper type as the stack bypass standard. | |
11.PAPER FEED SWITCH | Selects the paper feed method when you want to make one-sided or two-sided prints on preprinted paper (paper which has logos or patterns already printed on it). | Setting the Speed or Print Side Priority |
1. STACK BYPASS |
Selects the paper feed method for the stack bypass. | |
SPEED PRIORITY |
Print speed has priority. | |
PRINT SIDE |
The machine starts printing on the side of paper loaded facing up. Print speed becomes slower for one-sided printing. Only available for LTR, LGL and A4. |
|
2. DRAWER 1 |
Selects the paper feed method for paper drawer 1. | |
SPEED PRIORITY |
Print speed has priority. | |
PRINT SIDE |
The machine starts printing on the side of paper loaded facing down. Print speed becomes slower for one-sided printing. | |
3. DRAWER 2*2 |
Selects the paper feed method for paper drawer 2. | |
SPEED PRIORITY |
Print speed has priority. | |
PRINT SIDE |
The machine starts printing on the side of paper loaded facing down. Print speed becomes slower for one-sided printing. | |
12.DISPLAY LANGUAGE | Selects the language on the display. | Changing the Language Shown on the Display |
13.ADF DIRTY ERROR*3 | Sets whether the error message will appear when the ADF is dirty.
|
|
14.INIT. COMMON SET. | Restores all <COMMON SETTINGS> to the default except for <DISPLAY LANGUAGE>.
|
Returning the Common Settings to Their Defaults |
*1 Settings of the tone levels are not availeble on imageRUNNER 1025/1025N. |
COPY SETTINGS |
Setting Item | Description | Applicable Page |
1. IMAGE DIR PRIORITY | Sets whether to activate the image direction priority. | |
OFF |
Copy orientation is same as the document. | |
ON |
Copy orientation is rotated at 180 degrees. | |
2. STANDARD SETTINGS | Sets the default setting for copying. | Changing the Standard Mode |
1. IMAGE QUALITY |
Sets the document type for copying.
|
|
2. DENSITY |
Sets the density for copying.
|
|
3. ZOOM RATIO |
Sets the zoom ratio for copying. | |
PRESET RATIO |
Selects the zoom from the preset ratios. (100%, 115% B5→A4, 122% A5→B5, 129% STMT→LTR, 141% A5→A4, 200% MAX., 50% MIN., 64%, 70% A4→A5, 78% LGL→LTR, 81% B5→A5, 86% A4→B5) |
|
MANUAL |
Enters the zoom ratio by 1% increments. (50%–200%) | |
4. COPIES |
Sets the number of copies (1-99). | |
5. AUTO COLLATE |
Sets whether to collate the copies automatically.
|
|
6. TWO-SIDED |
Sets the type of two-sided copying.
|
|
7. FRAME ERASE |
Sets the type of Frame Erase copying.
|
|
8. PAPER SELECT |
Sets the paper source for copying.
|
|
3. SHARPNESS | Adjusts the sharpness of the copied image. (1-9) | Adjusting Sharpness (Copy) |
4. PAPER SIZE GROUP | Selects a paper size group for your machine.
|
|
5. MM/INCH ENTRY | Sets the unit of measurement of the frame erase width.
|
Enabling the Inch Entry |
6. INIT. COPY SET. | Restores all <COPY SETTINGS> to the default.
|
Initializing the Standard Mode |
*1 Only for users of the optional paper drawer |
TX/RX SETTINGS (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only) |
Setting Item | Description | Applicable Page |
1. COMMON SETTINGS | Sets the features common to the fax and send functions. | |
1. TX SETTINGS |
Sets the transmission features. | |
1. UNIT NAME |
Registers your name/company name (24 characters maximum, including spaces). | Register User Telephone Number and Unit Name |
2. DATA COMPRESSION |
Sets the compression ratio for color scanned data. A high compression ratio reduces the amount of memory used for the document, but results in low quality images. Conversely, a low compression ratio increases the amount of memory used for the document, but results in high quality images.
|
Specifying the Data Compression Ratio for Color Send Jobs (Scan to File Server) Specifying the Data Compression Ratio for Color Send Jobs (E-Mail) |
3. RETRY TIMES |
Sets the number of retry attempts for sending jobs to an e-mail, I-fax, or file server address. (0-5) | Resending Data Automatically When an Error Occurs (RETRY TIMES) (I-Fax) Resending Data Automatically When an Error Occurs (RETRY TIMES) (Scan to File Server) |
4. SCANNING DENSITY |
Adjusts the scanning density for sending documents. (1-9) | |
5. STANDARD SETTINGS |
Sets the default settings for sending documents. | Storing the Standard Send Settings (Fax) Storing the Standard Send Settings (I-Fax) Storing the Standard Send Settings (Scan to File Server) Storing the Standard Send Settings (E-Mail) |
1. DENSITY |
Sets the default density for the document you send.
|
|
2. IMAGE QUALITY |
Sets the default image quality for the document you send. (200 x 200dpi, 200 x 400dpi, 300 x 300dpi, 400 x 400dpi, 600 X 600dpi, 100 X 100dpi, 150 X 150dpi, 200 x 100dpi) | |
3. IMAGE FORMAT |
Sets the default file format for the document you send.
|
|
4. ORIGINAL TYPE |
Sets the default original type for the document you send.
|
|
5. DIVIDE INTO PAGES |
Sets whether to use <DIVIDE INTO PAGES> as the default.
|
|
6. DIRECT TX |
Sets whether to use <DIRECT TX> as the default.
|
|
6. SEND SETTINGS |
Sets the options for sending documents to an e-mail or I-fax address, or file server. | |
1. TX FILE NAME |
Sets the name of the document you send to an e-mail or I-fax address, or file server. (24 characters maximum, including spaces.) | Naming a Sent Document Using an I-Fax Naming a Sent Document Using a File Server Naming a Sent Document Using an E-Mail |
2. SUBJECT |
Sets the subject for your e-mail/I-fax message. (40 characters maximum, including spaces.) | Subject/Message (I-Fax) Subject/Message (E-Mail) |
3. MESSAGE TEXT |
Sets the message body text for your e-mail/I-fax message. (140 characters maximum, including spaces.) | Subject/Message (I-Fax) Message (Scan to File Server) Subject/Message (E-Mail) |
4. REPLY-TO |
Sets the reply-to address for your e-mail/I-fax message. (120 characters maximum, including spaces.) | Reply-to (I-Fax) Reply-to (E-Mail) |
5. E-MAIL PRIORITY |
Sets the priority for your e-mail message.
|
E-Mail Priority |
7. TX TERMINAL ID |
Sets the options for sender information. | |
1. PRINTING POSITION |
Selects where the sender information is printed in small type at the top of each page.
|
|
2. TELEPHONE # MARK |
Prefixes your number/I-fax address with the abbreviations FAX, IFAX, or TEL in your sender information.
|
|
8. COLOR TX GAMMA |
Sets the gamma value for color scanned data. If the set value corresponds to the gamma value at the recipient's machine, the scan exposure of the output data at the recipient's machine is automatically adjusted to the level best suited to the quality of the original. (GAMMA 1.8, GAMMA 2.2, GAMMA 1.0, GAMMA 1.4) |
Specifying the Gamma Value for Sending Color Documents (Scan to File Server) Specifying the Gamma Value for Sending Color Documents (E-Mail) |
9. SHARPNESS |
Sets the contrast of the images you scan. (1-7) | Adjusting Sharpness (Fax) Adjusting Sharpness (I-Fax) Adjusting Sharpness (Scan to File Server) Adjusting Sharpness (E-Mail) |
10. COLOR TX SCAN SET |
Sets the priority for color scanned data. | |
SPEED PRIORITY |
Reduces the time spent in sending the document, but results in lower quality images. | |
IMAGE PRIORITY |
Increases the time spent in sending the document, but results in higher quality images. | |
11. INIT STANDARD SET |
Sets whether to restore <STANDARD SETTINGS> in <TX SETTINGS> to the default.
|
Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default (Fax) Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default (I-Fax) Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default (Scan to File Server) Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default (E-Mail) |
2. RX SETTINGS |
Sets the reception features. | |
1. TWO-SIDED PRINT |
Sets the type of two-sided printing for faxing.
|
Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Paper (Fax) Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Paper (I-Fax) |
2. RECEIVE REDUCTION |
Sets whether the received images print out at a reduced size. | Reducing a Received Document (Fax) Reducing a Received Document (I-Fax) |
ON |
Image reduction is turned on. | |
1. RX REDUCTION |
Selects the reducing type.
|
|
2. REDUCE DIRECTION |
Selects the reducing direction.
|
|
OFF |
Image reduction is turned off. | |
3. CONT. PRINTING |
Selects how the machine responds when the <TONER LOW/PREPARE NEW TONER> message appears. | Specifying Printing When Toner Runs Out (Fax) Specifying Printing When Toner Runs Out (I-Fax) |
RX TO MEMORY |
The machine stores all documents in memory. | |
KEEP PRINTING |
The machine does not store documents in memory if the toner runs out. Reset to <RX TO MEMORY> after replacing the toner cartridge. | |
2. FAX SETTINGS | Sets the fax features. | |
1. USER SETTINGS |
Specifies the basic operation settings in the fax mode. | User Settings (Send/Receive Settings - Fax Settings) |
1. UNIT TELEPHONE # |
Registers your fax number (20 characters maximum, including spaces). | Register User Telephone Number and Unit Name |
2. TEL LINE TYPE |
Selects the telephone line type.
|
Setting the Type of Telephone Line (Fax) |
3. OFFHOOK ALARM |
Sets whether the alarm sounds when the handset of the external telephone is off the hook.
|
|
4. VOLUME CONTROL |
Adjusts the monitor volume and the calling volume. | |
1. MONITOR VOL. CTRL |
Sets the volume for monitor tone during the fax transmission. (0-3) | |
2. CALLING VOLUME |
Set the volume of the ring produced when the machine detects a call. (1-3) | |
2. TX SETTINGS |
Sets the transmission features. | |
1. ECM TX |
Sets whether the ECM (Error Correction Mode) transmission is activated.
|
ECM Transmission (Fax) |
2. PAUSE TIME |
Sets the pause time when you insert pause into the dialing sequence. (1SEC–15SEC) | Adjusting the Pause Time (Fax) |
3. AUTO REDIAL |
Sets whether to redial automatically when the other line is busy or a transmission error occurs. | Redialing Automatically When the Line Is Busy (AUTO REDIAL) (Fax) |
ON |
Customizes the redial operation. | |
1. REDIAL TIMES |
Sets the number of retries. (1TIMES–10TIMES) | |
2. REDIAL INTERVAL |
Sets period of time before redialing. (2MIN.–99MIN.) | |
3. TX ERROR REDIAL |
Sets whether the machine redials automatically when transmission error occurs.
|
|
OFF |
After the first attempt at dialing fails, redialing is not attempted. | |
4. TIME OUT |
Sets whether to scan a document automatically after specifying the destination. (This function is not available when you dial with the numeric keys)
|
|
5. DIALING LINE CHCK |
Sets whether to check the telephone line condition.
|
Checking the Dial Line before Sending (Fax) |
3. RX SETTINGS |
Sets the reception features. | |
1. ECM RX |
Sets whether the ECM (Error Correction Mode) reception is activated.
|
ECM Reception (Fax) |
2. RX MODE |
Selects the receive mode.
|
Selecting the Receive Mode (Fax) |
3. FAX/TEL OPT. SET |
Sets the optional items in the <FaxTel> mode. | Adjusting the Auto Switch Time (Fax) |
1. RING START TIME |
Sets the time the machine takes to check whether a call is a fax or a voice call. (0SEC–30SEC) | |
2. F/T RING TIME |
Selects the ring length for voice calls. (15SEC–300SEC) | |
3. F/T SWITCH ACTION |
Selects whether the machine switches to the receive mode after the ring time has elapsed, or whether if disconnects the call.
|
|
4. DRPD:SELECT FAX |
Selects the ring pattern for fax calls.
|
|
5. INCOMING RING |
Sets whether the external telephone rings when the machine receives a voice call or fax, enabling you to answer the voice call. This function is only available when the <RX MODE> is set to <FaxOnly> or <FaxTel>. | Setting the Incoming Ring (Fax) |
OFF |
The telephone does not ring when the machine receives a voice call or fax. (In the Sleep mode, the telephone may ring one or two times, if <ENERGY IN SLEEP> in <COMMON SETTINGS> is set to <LOW>.) | |
ON |
The telephone rings when the machine receives a voice call or fax if an external telephone is connected. | |
RING COUNT |
Sets the number of incoming rings before the machine answers. (1TIMES–99TIMES) | |
6. REMOTE RX |
Sets whether to use remote receiving. | Receiving Documents Manually with an Extension Telephone (REMOTE RX) (Fax) |
ON |
The machine enables remote receiving. | Activating Remote Receive Mode (Fax) |
REMOTE RX ID |
You can dial a code on remote extension to start receiving a document. A combination of two characters using 0 to 9, * and # is possible. |
|
OFF |
The machine disables remote receiving. | |
7. MANUAL/AUTO |
Sets whether the machine switches to the document receive mode after the external telephone rings for a specified length of time in the manual receive mode. | |
OFF |
The external telephone keeps ringing until someone answers the call manually. | |
ON |
The machine switches to the document receive mode after the external telephone rings for a specified time. | |
F/T RING TIME |
Sets the length of time to elapse before the machine switches to document receiving. (1SEC–99SEC) |
ADDRESS BOOK SET. (imageRUNNER 1025iF Only) |
Setting Item | Description | Applicable Page |
1. FAVORITES BUTTONS | Registers destinations together with a combination of the scan and send settings for frequent use. (M1–M4: One-touch keys 01 to 04 are used for this feature.) | |
FAX |
Registers fax numbers. | Registering a Favorites Button (Fax) |
1. NAME |
Registers the recipient's name (16 characters maximum, including spaces). | |
2. TEL NUMBER ENTRY |
Registers the recipient's fax number (120 digits maximum, including spaces). | |
3. IMAGEQUALITY |
Sets the image quality.
|
|
4. OPTIONAL SETTING |
Selects whether to use the advanced functional settings for each one-touch key registered in the machine. | |
OFF |
The optional setting is not set for this destination. | |
ON |
The optional setting is set for this destination. | |
1. ECM |
Selects whether to use ECM (Error Correction Mode).
|
|
2. TX SPEED |
Select the transmission speed. (33600bps, 14400bps, 9600bps, 4800bps) |
|
3. INTERNATIONAL |
Selects a mode for documents you are sending.
|
|
Registers e-mail addresses. | Registering a Favorites Button (E-Mail) | |
1. NAME |
Registers the recipient's name (16 characters maximum, including spaces). | |
2. E-MAIL ADDRESS |
Registers the recipient's e-mail address (120 characters maximum). | |
3. IMAGE FORMAT |
Sets the file format for a file attached to an e-mail message.
|
|
4. DIVIDE INTO PAGES |
Sets if multiple images are sent as separate files or as a single file. | |
OFF |
Sends multiple images as a single file without dividing them. | |
ON |
Separates multiple images and send them as separate files. | |
5. IMAGEQUALITY |
Sets the resolution of the document you send. (200 x 200dpi, 200 x 400dpi, 300 x 300dpi, 400 x 400dpi, 600 X 600dpi, 100 X 100dpi, 150 X 150dpi, 200 x 100dpi) |
|
6. ORIGINAL TYPE |
Sets the original type for the document you send.
|
|
IFAX |
Registers I-fax addresses. | Registering a Favorites Button (I-Fax) |
1. NAME |
Registers the recipient's name (16 characters maximum, including spaces). | |
2. I-FAX ADDRESS |
Registers the recipient's I-fax address (120 characters maximum). | |
3. DIVIDE INTO PAGES |
Sets if multiple images are sent as separate files or as a single file. | |
OFF |
Sends multiple images as a single file without dividing them. | |
ON |
Separates multiple images and send them as separate files. | |
4. IMAGEQUALITY |
Sets the resolution of the document you send. (200 x 200dpi, 200 x 400dpi, 300 x 300dpi, 400 x 400dpi, 600 X 600dpi, 100 X 100dpi, 150 X 150dpi, 200 x 100dpi) |
|
5. ORIGINAL TYPE |
Sets the original type for the document you send.
|
|
FTP |
Registers FTP addresses. | |
1. NAME |
Registers the recipient's name (16 characters maximum, including spaces). | Registering a Favorites Button (Scan to File Server) |
2. HOST NAME |
Registers the name of the file server (120 characters maximum). | |
3. FILE PATH |
Registers the path to the file server (120 characters maximum). | |
4. LOGIN NAME |
Registers the login name to access the file server (24 characters maximum). | |
5. PASSWORD |
Registers the password to access the file server (24 characters maximum). | |
6. IMAGE FORMAT |
Sets the file format.
|
|
7. DIVIDE INTO PAGES |
Sets if multiple images are sent as separate files or as a single file. | |
OFF |
Sends multiple images as a single file without dividing them. | |
ON |
Separates multiple images and send them as separate files. | |
8. IMAGEQUALITY |
Sets the resolution of the document you send. (200 x 200dpi, 200 x 400dpi, 300 x 300dpi, 400 x 400dpi, 600 X 600dpi, 100 X 100dpi, 150 X 150dpi, 200 x 100dpi) |
|
9. ORIGINAL TYPE |
Sets the original type for the document you send.
|
|
SMB |
Registers SMB addresses. | |
1. NAME |
Registers the recipient's name (16 characters maximum, including spaces). | |
2. HOST NAME |
Registers the name of the file server (120 characters maximum). | |
3. FILE PATH |
Registers the path to the file server (120 characters maximum). | |
4. LOGIN NAME |
Registers the login name to access the file server (24 characters maximum). | |
5. PASSWORD |
Registers the password to access the file server (14 characters maximum). | |
6. IMAGE FORMAT |
Sets the file format.
|
|
7. DIVIDE INTO PAGES |
Sets if multiple images are sent as separate files or as a single file. | |
OFF |
Sends multiple images as a single file without dividing them. | |
ON |
Separates multiple images and send them as separate files. | |
8. IMAGEQUALITY |
Sets the resolution of the document you send. (200 x 200dpi, 200 x 400dpi, 300 x 300dpi, 400 x 400dpi, 600 X 600dpi, 100 X 100dpi, 150 X 150dpi, 200 x 100dpi) |
|
9. ORIGINAL TYPE |
Sets the original type for the document you send.
|
|
2. 1-TOUCH SPD DIAL | Registers the destinations on one-touch keys (23 destinations maximum) | |
FAX |
Registers fax numbers. | Registering Fax Numbers in One-touch Keys |
1. NAME |
Registers the recipient's name (16 characters maximum, including spaces). | |
2. TEL NUMBER ENTRY |
Registers the recipient's fax number (120 digits maximum, including spaces). | |
3. OPTIONAL SETTING |
Sets the optional settings for sending faxes. | |
OFF |
The optional setting is not set. | |
ON |
The optional setting is set. | |
1. ECM |
Selects whether to use ECM (Error Correction Mode).
|
|
2. TX SPEED |
Selects the transmission speed. (33600bps, 14400bps, 9600bps, 4800bps) |
|
3. INTERNATIONAL |
Selects a mode for documents you are sending.
|
|
Registers e-mail addresses. | Registering E-Mail Addresses in One-touch Keys | |
1. NAME |
Registers the recipient's name (16 characters maximum, including spaces). | |
2. E-MAIL ADDRESS |
Registers the recipient's e-mail address (120 characters maximum). | |
IFAX |
Registers I-fax addresses. | Registering I-Fax Addresses in One-touch Keys |
1. NAME |
Registers the recipient's name (16 characters maximum, including spaces). | |
2. I-FAX ADDRESS |
Registers the recipient's I-fax address (120 characters maximum). | |
FTP |
Registers FTP addresses. | Registering File Server Addresses in One-touch Keys |
1. NAME |
Registers the recipient's name (16 characters maximum, including spaces). | |
2. HOST NAME |
Registers the name of the file server (120 characters maximum). | |
3. FILE PATH |
Registers the path to the file server (120 characters maximum). | |
4. LOGIN NAME |
Registers the login name to access the file server (24 characters maximum). | |
5. PASSWORD |
Registers the password to access the file server (24 characters maximum). | |
SMB |
Registers SMB addresses. | |
1. NAME |
Registers the recipient's name (16 characters maximum, including spaces). | |
2. HOST NAME |
Registers the name of the file server (120 characters maximum). | |
3. FILE PATH |
Registers the path to the file server (120 characters maximum). | |
4. LOGIN NAME |
Registers the login name to access the file server (24 characters maximum). | |
5. PASSWORD |
Registers the password to access the file server (14 characters maximum). | |
3. CODED SPD DIAL | Registers the destinations for coded dial codes. Up to 177 destinations can be registered. | |
FAX |
Registers fax numbers. | Registering Fax Numbers in Coded Dial Codes |
1. NAME |
Registers the recipient's name (16 characters maximum, including spaces). | |
2. TEL NUMBER ENTRY |
Registers the recipient's fax number (120 digits maximum, including spaces). | |
3. OPTIONAL SETTING |
Sets the optional settings for sending faxes. | |
OFF |
The optional setting is not set. | |
ON |
The optional setting is set. | |
1. ECM |
Selects whether to use ECM (Error Correction Mode).
|
|
2. TX SPEED |
Selects the transmission speed. (33600bps, 14400bps, 9600bps, 4800bps) |
|
3. INTERNATIONAL |
Selects a mode for documents you are sending.
|
|
Registers e-mail addresses. | Registering E-Mail Addresses in Coded Dial Codes | |
1. NAME |
Registers the recipient's name (16 characters maximum, including spaces). | |
2. E-MAIL ADDRESS |
Registers the recipient's e-mail address (120 characters maximum). | |
IFAX |
Registers I-fax addresses. | Registering I-Fax Addresses in Coded Dial Codes |
1. NAME |
Registers the recipient's name (16 characters maximum, including spaces). | |
2. I-FAX ADDRESS |
Registers the recipient's I-fax address (120 characters maximum). | |
FTP |
Registers FTP addresses. | Registering File Server Addresses in Coded Dial Codes |
1. NAME |
Registers the recipient's name (16 characters maximum, including spaces). | |
2. HOST NAME |
Registers the name of the file server (120 characters maximum). | |
3. FILE PATH |
Registers the path to the file server (120 characters maximum). | |
4. LOGIN NAME |
Registers the login name to access the file server (24 characters maximum). | |
5. PASSWORD |
Registers the password to access the file server (24 characters maximum). | |
SMB |
Registers SMB addresses. | |
1. NAME |
Registers the recipient's name (16 characters maximum, including spaces). | |
2. HOST NAME |
Registers the name of the file server (120 characters maximum). | |
3. FILE PATH |
Registers the path to the file server (120 characters maximum). | |
4. LOGIN NAME |
Registers the login name to access the file server (24 characters maximum). | |
5. PASSWORD |
Registers the password to access the file server (14 characters maximum). | |
4. GROUP DIAL | Registers destinations in group addresses (199 destinations maximum). | Registering Group Addresses in One-touch Keys Registering Group Addresses in Coded Dial Codes |
1. SELECT ADD/TEL NO |
Registers the recipient's numbers and addresses by specifying the one-touch keys or coded dial codes. | |
2. NAME |
Registers the group name (16 characters maximum, including spaces). |
PRINTER SETTINGS |
Setting Item | Description | Applicable Page |
1. DEFAULT PAPERSIZE | Sets the default paper size when no paper source is specified. (LTR, STMT, EXECUTIV, ISO-B5, ISO-C5, COM10, MONARCH, DL, A4, B5, A5, LGL) |
DEFAULT PAPERSIZE |
2. DEFAULT PAPERTYPE | Sets the default paper type for print jobs. This machine has internally defined optimal print modes for each specified paper type. (PLAIN PAPER, COLOR, RECYCLED, HEAVY PAPER 1, HEAVY PAPER 2, HEAVY PAPER 3, BOND, 3HOLE PUNCH PAPER, TRANSPARENCY, LABELS, ENVELOPE) |
DEFAULT PAPERTYPE |
3. COPIES | Sets the number of documents printed. (1-999) | COPIES |
4. 2-SIDED PRINTING | Sets whether to activate two-sided printing.
|
2-SIDED PRINTING |
5. PRINT QUALITY | Sets the image quality, density or toner saving mode for printing. | PRINT QUALITY |
1. IMAGE REFINEMENT |
Sets whether to print smoothly the jagged outlines of characters and graphics.
|
IMAGE REFINEMENT |
2. DENSITY |
Adjusts the print density. (1-9) | DENSITY |
3. TONER SAVER |
Sets whether the toner saving mode is enabled.
|
TONER SAVER |
6. PAGE LAYOUT | Sets the printing layout. | PAGE LAYOUT |
1. BINDING |
Sets the binding position for two-sided printing.
|
BINDING |
2. MARGIN |
Sets the page margin in inches or millimeters.
|
MARGIN |
7. COLLATE | Sets whether to collate the printouts automatically.
|
COLLATE |
8. ERROR TIME OUT | Sets the length of time before the machine returns an error when no data is received from the computer. | ERROR TIME OUT |
ON |
Sets the error time out period. (5SEC–300SEC) | |
OFF |
The error time out is off. | |
9. INIT. PRINTER SET | Restores all <PRINTER SETTINGS> to the defaults.
|
INIT.PRINTER SET |
10.PCL SETTINGS*1 | Sets the PCL printer setting. | PCL SETTINGS (PCL Only) |
1. ORIENTATION |
Sets the paper orientation.
|
ORIENTATION (PCL Only) |
2. FONT NUMBER |
Sets the default font typeface for the printer function using the corresponding font numbers. (0-120) | FONT NUMBER (PCL Only) |
3. POINT SIZE |
Specifies a point size for the default font. This item appears when the number in <FONT NUMBER> is that of a proportionally spaced scalable font. (4.00–999.75) | POINT SIZE (PCL Only) |
4. PITCH |
Specifies the pitch for the default font. This item appears when the number in <FONT NUMBER> is that of a fixed pitch scalable font. (0.44–99.99) | PITCH (PCL Only) |
5. FORM LINES |
Sets the number of lines to be printed on a page. (5-128) | FORM LINES (PCL Only) |
6. SYMBOL SET |
Selects the symbol set most suited to the needs of the host computer. | SYMBOL SET (PCL Only) |
7. CUSTOM PAPER |
Sets whether to use a custom paper size. | CUSTOM PAPER (PCL Only) |
OFF |
Disables you to specify a custom paper size. | |
ON |
Enables you to specify a custom paper size. | |
1. UNIT OF MEASURE |
Selects the unit of measurement to specify a custom paper size.
|
|
2. X DIMENSION |
Specifies the horizontal size of the custom paper. (05.00–14.00" (127–356 mm)) | |
3. Y DIMENSION |
Specifies the vertical size of the custom paper. (03.00–08.50" (76–216 mm)) | |
8. APPEND CR TO LF |
Sets whether to append a carriage return (CR) when line feed code (LF) is received. | APPEND CR TO LF (PCL Only) |
NO |
The print head moves down to the next line when line feed code is received, and the margin does not change (such as the beginning of the next line). | |
YES |
The print head moves to the beginning of the next line when line feed code is received. | |
9. ENLARGE A4 |
Sets whether to expand the printable area of A4 size paper to that of Letter size in width. * This setting is applicable for A4 paper and portrait orientation for the PCL5 printing only. The PCL6 printing is not supported. |
ENLARGE A4 (PCL Only) |
OFF |
All the area on a page 1/8" (4.23 mm) from the top, bottom, left, and right edges is available for printing on A4 paper. | |
ON |
All the area on a page 1/8" (4.23 mm) from the top and bottom edges and 1/8" (3.30 mm) from the left and right edges is available for printing on A4 paper. Only the width increases. | |
10. BarDIMM*2 |
Sets whether to use the bar code printing function. | BarDIMM (PCL Only) |
ENABLE |
Sets the bar code printing function to on. FreeScape: ~, ", #, $, /, \, ?, {, }, |, OFF |
|
DISABLE |
Sets the bar code printing function to off. | |
11. RESET PRINTER |
Clears all print jobs in progress and resets the printer function.
|
RESET PRINTER |
*1 Only for users of the PCL Printer Kit |
TIMER SETTINGS |
Setting Item | Description | Applicable Page |
1. DATE&TIME SETTING | Sets the current date and time. | Setting the Current Date and Time |
2. TIME ZONE SETTING | Sets the time zone of your machine's location. | Setting the Time Zone |
3. DATE TYPE SELECT | Sets the date format.
|
Setting the Date Type |
4. AUTO SLEEP TIME | Sets the auto sleep mode when the machine remains idle for a certain period of time. (3MIN.–30MIN.)
|
Setting the Sleep Mode |
5. AUTO CLEAR TIME | Sets the auto clear mode when the machine has no operation idle for a certain period of time. (1MIN.–9MIN.) The machine returns to the standby mode.
|
Setting the Auto Clear Time |
6. DAYLIGHT SV.TIME | Sets the daylight saving time mode. | Setting the Daylight Saving Time |
OFF |
Deactivates the daylight saving time mode. | |
ON |
Activates the daylight saving time mode. | |
1. START DATE/TIME |
Sets the start date.
|
|
2. END DATE/TIME |
Sets the end date.
|
ADJUST./CLEANING |
Setting Item | Description | Applicable Page |
1. TRANS. ROLR CLEAN | Cleans the transcription roller. | Transcription Roller |
2. DRUM CLEANING | Cleans the drum. | Drum Unit |
3. FIX.UNIT CLEANING | Cleans the fuser roller. | Fuser Roller |
4. FEEDER CLEANING*1 | Cleans the ADF. | Cleaning the ADF Automatically |
5. SPECIAL MODE M | Sets to improve print quality or fix irregular print density. If print quality decreases or an irregularity in the print density appears, transcription output may not function adequately. | |
MID |
Selects in normal conditions. | |
LOW |
Selects to compensate for poor print quality that occurs when using paper that was stored for a long time at high temperatures and high humidity. | |
HIGH |
Selects to compensate for poor quality that occurs when using heavyweight paper. | |
6. SPECIAL MODE N | When the two-sided printing function is used, paper may curl severely or become jammed. Enable this setting to prevent paper curling or jamming.
|
|
7. SPECIAL MODE P | Sets to activate when lightweight paper or paper which is easy to get uneven print density is used for printing.
|
|
8. SPECIAL MODE S | Sets whether to reduce the waiting time for the next printout. When you change the paper size after continuous printing, the machine may take a while to start the next printing. |
|
OFF |
Does not reduce the waiting time next set of printout. (default) | |
SPEED PRIORITY |
Reduces the waiting time to start the next set of printout. Print speed has priority; however, it is possible that a previously printed image may be printed faintly on the next output. |
|
9. CONT. PRINT MODE | Sets whether to prevent the back edge of the previous page from appearing on the following page during continuous printing of half-tone prints or photographs.
|
|
10.BACK EDGE MODE | Sets whether to prevent back edge of paper from smudging.
|
|
11.LARGE PAPER MODE | Sets whether to improve toner fix on large size paper.
|
|
12.AUTO ADF DRTY ADJ*1 | Sets whether to activate smudge (due to dust or dirt) reduction during printing. When the ADF is dirty, copies may contain unwanted dots or lines.
|
Adjusting Feeder Smudge |
13.MAINTENANCE CODE | This setting is not functional in this model. |
*1 Not applicable for imageRUNNER1025. |
REPORT SETTINGS |
Setting Item | Description | Applicable Page |
1. SETTINGS*1 | Sets the report functions. | |
1. TX REPORT |
Sets whether the transmission report prints out. | TX Report |
PRINT ERROR ONLY |
Prints a report only when a transmission error occurs. | |
REPORT WITH TX IMAGE |
Sets whether to print the first page of the document under the report.
|
|
OUTPUT YES |
Prints a report every time you send a document. | |
REPORT WITH TX IMAGE |
Sets whether to print the first page of the document under the report.
|
|
OUTPUT NO |
No report is printed. | |
2. RX REPORT |
Sets whether the reception report prints out.
|
RX Report |
3. ACTIVITY REPORT |
Sets whether to automatically print the transaction report and selects its type. | Activity Report |
1. AUTO PRINT |
Sets whether an activity report is printed automatically every 40 transactions.
|
|
2. TX/RX SEPARATE |
Sets whether an activity report is printed separately for sending and receiving.
|
|
2. LIST PRINT | Prints reports/lists. | Printing Reports and Lists Manually |
1. ACTIVITY REPORT*1 |
Prints the transaction report (last 40 transactions maximum) manually. | Printing Activity Report |
2. SPEED DIAL LIST*1 |
Prints the list of destinations registered in Address Book.
|
Printing Speed Dial List |
3. ADD BOOK DETAILS*1 |
Prints the details of Address Book.
|
Printing Address Book Details List |
4. USER DATA LIST |
Prints the setting list registered in the menu. | Printing User's Data List |
*1 Only for the imageRUNNER1025iF. |
SYSTEM SETTINGS |
Setting Item | Description | Applicable Page |
1. SYS. MANAGER INFO | Sets the system manager information to protect the contents of <SYSTEM SETTINGS>. Once the system manager ID and system password is set, they must be entered every time you access the <SYSTEM SETTINGS> menu. | Specifying the System Manager Settings |
1. SYS. MANAGER ID |
Sets the system manager ID (seven digits). | |
2. SYSTEM PASSWORD |
Sets the system manager password (seven digits). | |
3. SYSTEM MANAGER |
Sets the system manager name (32 characters maximum, including spaces). | |
2. DEVICE INFO | Sets the device information. | Device Information Settings |
1. DEVICE NAME |
Registers the machine name (32 characters maximum, including spaces). | |
2. LOCATION |
Registers the machine location (32 characters maximum, including spaces). | |
3. MANAGE DEPT. ID | Sets if the Department ID management is used. | Registering the Department ID, Password, and Page Limit |
OFF |
The Department ID management is not used. | |
ON |
The Department ID management is used. | |
1. REGISTER DEPT. ID |
Registers the Department ID (0001-1000). | |
1. PASSWORD |
Registers the Department ID management password. | |
2. PAGE LIMIT SET. |
Sets the page limits for scans, prints, and copies (0 - 999,999 pages). | |
1. TOTAL PRINT |
Sets the total page limit. | |
1. RESTRICT TOTAL |
Sets if the total page limit is used.
|
|
2. PAGE TOTALS |
Sets the page limits for (0 - 999,999 pages). | |
2. COPY |
Sets the limit for copies. | |
1. RESTRICT COPY |
Sets if the copy limit is used.
|
|
2. COPY LIMIT |
Sets the page limits for (0 - 999,999 pages). | |
3. SCAN |
Sets the limit for scans. | |
1. RESTRICT B&W SCAN |
Sets if the scan limit is used.
|
|
2. SCAN LIMIT |
Sets the page limits for (0 - 999,999 pages). | |
4. COLOR SCAN |
Sets the limit for color scans. | |
1. RESTRICT CLR SCAN |
Sets if the color scan limit is used.
|
|
2. COLOR SCAN LIMIT |
Sets the page limits for (0 - 999,999 pages). | |
5. PRINT |
Sets the limit for prints. | |
1. RESTRICT PRINT |
Sets if the print limit is used.
|
|
2. PRINT LIMIT |
Sets the page limits for (0 - 999,999 pages). | |
3. ERASE |
Erases the Department ID and password.
|
|
2. PAGE TOTALS |
Displays, clears, and prints counter information. | |
1. VIEW PAGE TOTALS |
Displays how much paper was used by each department.
|
|
2. CLEAR ALL TOTAL |
Clears counter information. | |
3. PRINT LIST |
Prints counter information. | |
3. PDL JOBS W/OUT ID |
Sets if print jobs from computers with unknown IDs are accepted or rejected. | Accepting Print Jobs with Unknown IDs |
ON |
Accepts print jobs from computers with unknown IDs. | |
OFF |
Rejects print jobs from computers with unknown IDs. | |
4. MANAGE USER ID | Sets if the User ID management is used.
|
Managing User IDs |
5. NETWORK SETTINGS*1 | Sets the network setting. | Network Settings |
1. TCP/IP SETTINGS |
Sets TCP/IP network. | Setting IP Address Automatically |
1. IP ADDRESS AUTO. |
Sets whether to automatically set an IP address. | |
ON |
Enables an IP address to the machine automatically.
|
|
OFF |
Allocate an IP address to the machine manually. | |
2. IP ADDRESS |
Registers a fixed IP address to the machine. | Setting IP Address Manually |
3. SUBNET MASK |
Registers a fixed subnet mask address to the machine. | |
4. GATEWAY ADDRESS |
Registers a fixed gateway address to the machine. | |
5. DNS SETTINGS |
Sets the DNS server settings. | Setting DNS |
1. PRIMARY SERVER |
Registers the primary server address. | |
2. SECONDARY SERVER |
Registers the secondary server address. | |
3. HOST NAME |
Registers the host name of the DNS server. | |
4. DOMAIN NAME |
Registers the domain name of the DNS server. | |
5. DNS DYNA. UPDATE |
This setting is not functional in this model. | |
6. CONFIGURE WINS |
Sets the WINS settings to resolve a name with WINS. | Setting WINS |
1. WINS RESOLUTION |
Sets whether to resolve a name with WINS.
|
|
2. WINS SERVER |
Registers the IP address of a WINS server. | |
7. USE LPD |
Sets whether to use LPD as the print application.
|
|
8. RAW SETTINGS |
Sets whether to use RAW as the print application. | |
ON |
Enables to use RAW. | |
1. USE BIDIRECTIONAL |
Sets whether to use bidirectional communication.
|
|
OFF |
Disables to use RAW. | |
9. USE PASV MODE |
Sets the PASV mode for FTP.
|
Setting PASV Mode for FTP |
10.FTP EXTENSION |
Sets the FTP Extension settings.
|
Setting FTP Extension |
11.USE HTTP |
Sets whether to activate HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol) for the Remote UI.
|
Setting the Use of HTTP |
12.PROXY SETTINGS |
Sets whether to use a Proxy server. | Setting Proxy |
1. USE PROXY |
Enables to use a Proxy server.
|
|
13.PORT NO. |
Sets the port number settings. | Setting Port Number |
1. LPD |
0-65535 (default:515) | |
2. RAW |
0-65535 (default:9100) | |
3. HTTP |
0-65535 (default:80) | |
4. SMTP RX |
0-65535 (default:25) | |
5. POP3 RX |
0-65535 (default:110) | |
6. FTP SENDING |
0-65535 (default:21) | |
7. SMTP TX |
0-65535 (default:25) | |
8. SNMP |
0-65535 (default:161) | |
14.SET IP ADD RANGE |
Sets whether to restrict the range of IP addresses. | Controlling the Machine Access using IP addresses |
OFF |
Disables restriction of IP address of computers. | |
ON |
Enables restriction of IP address of computers from which data (print/fax jobs) can be sent to the machine. | |
1. PERMIT/REJECT |
Selects whether to permit or reject access from a specified IP address.
|
|
2. SET IP ADDRESS |
Specifies the IP address range. <START IP ADDRESS> and <END IP ADDRESS> must be entered for each setting.
|
|
15.RX MAC ADD SET. |
Sets whether to activate a MAC address filter. | |
OFF |
Disables a MAC address filter. | |
ON |
Specifies a MAC address filter to access. A MAC address must be entered for each setting.
|
|
2. SMB SETTINGS*2 |
Sets the SMB settings to use the machine on a NetBIOS network. | |
1. USE SMB CLIENT |
Sets if SMB client is used. | |
OFF |
SMB client is not used. | |
ON |
SMB client is used. | |
1. SERVER |
Enters the NetBIOS name of the machine. | |
2. WORKGROUP |
Enters the name of the workgroup the machine belongs to. | |
3. COMMENT |
Enters a comment about the printer. | |
4. LM ANNOUNCE |
Sets if the machine notifies the LAN Manager of its existence.
|
|
3. SNMP SETTINGS |
Sets detailed information about SNMP. | Setting SNMP |
1. USE SNMP |
Sets whether to activate SNMP.
|
|
2. COMMUNITY NAME 1 |
Sets SNMP community name 1 (default: public). | |
3. COMMUNITY NAME 2 |
Sets SNMP community name 2. | |
4. SNMP WRITABLE 1 |
Enables computers on the network to access the machine and modify its settings.
|
|
5. SNMP WRITABLE 2 |
Enables computers on the network to access the machine and modify its settings.
|
|
4. DEDICATED PORT |
Sets or browses detailed information on the machine with a Canon printer driver or utility.
|
Setting Dedicated Port |
5. ETHERNET DRIVER |
Specifies the type of network connection. | Setting Speed and Duplex |
1. AUTO DETECT |
Selects the detection method of Ethernet driver. | |
AUTO |
Sets the machine to determine the communication mode (Half duplex/Full duplex) and Ethernet type (10Base-T/100Base-TX) automatically. | |
MANUAL |
Sets the communication mode and Ethernet type manually. | |
1. DUPLEX |
Selects the communication mode.
|
|
2. ETHERNET TYPE |
Selects the Ethernet type.
|
|
6. VIEW IP ADDRESS |
Checks the current network settings. | |
1. IP ADDRESS |
Checks the IP address. | |
2. SUBNET MASK |
Checks the subnet mask. | |
3. GATEWAY ADDRESS |
Checks the gateway address. | |
7. E-MAIL/I-FAX*2 |
When the Machine's Own SMTP Receiving Function is Used | |
1. SMTP RX |
Sets whether to receive e-mail/l-faxes using the machine's own SMTP receiving function.
|
|
2. SMTP SERVER |
Registers the host name of the machine with the DNS server. | When the SMTP Authentication is used |
3. POP |
Sets whether to receive e-mail/l-faxes using a POP server.
|
When a POP Server is Used |
4. E-MAIL ADDRESS |
Enters the e-mail address your machine will use (64 characters maximum). | |
5. POP SERVER |
Enters the POP server IP address or name (48 characters maximum). | |
6. POP ADDRESS |
Enters the login name for access to the POP server (32 characters maximum). | |
7. POP PASSWORD |
Enters the password for access to the POP server (32 characters maximum). | |
8. POP INTERVAL |
Sets the interval you want the POP server to check for incoming e-mail. If the interval is set to 0, the POP server is not checked automatically (0MIN.–99MIN.). | |
9. AUTH/ENC SETTINGS |
Specifies authenticating method before sending e-mail. | When no authentication is required |
1. POP BEFORE SEND. |
Sets whether to use the SMTP server requires POP before SMTP (method for authenticating users who have logged in the POP server before sending e-mail).
|
|
2. SMTP AUTH |
Sets whether to use the SMTP server requires SMTP Authentication (method for authenticating users who have logged in the POP server before sending e-mail).
|
|
8. STARTUP TIME SET. |
Sets the time period required to delay the startup of network communications for the machine (0–300SEC). | Setting Startup Time |
6. COMMUNICATIONS*2 | Sets the fax, e-mail, and I-fax communication. | |
1. E-MAIL/I-FAX |
Sets the e-mail/I-fax communications. | |
1. MAX TX DATA SIZE |
Sets the maximum data size for outgoing e-mail messages and I-fax documents. If the e-mail message exceeds this data size limit, it is split up into several e-mail messages before being sent. However, if an I-fax transmission exceeds the data size limit, it is handled as an error, and it is not sent. (0 to 99 MB) | Specifying the Maximum Data Size for Sending I-Faxes Specifying the Maximum Data Size for Sending E-Mails |
2. DIVIDED OVER MAX |
Sets whether to divide a document into separate files when it is sent if its size exceeds the data size you specify.
|
Dividing the Data for Sending I-Faxes Dividing the Data for Sending E-Mails |
2. FAX SETTINGS |
Sets the facsimile communication. | |
1. TX START SPEED |
Sets the transmission start speed for faxes. (33600bps, 2400bps, 4800bps, 7200bps, 9600bps, 14400bps) | |
2. RX START SPEED |
Sets the reception start speed for faxes. (33600bps, 2400bps, 4800bps, 7200bps, 9600bps, 14400bps) | |
3. MEMORY LOCK |
Sets whether to receive and store all documents in memory and not to print automatically. | Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out (MEMORY LOCK) (Fax) |
OFF |
Disables memory reception. | |
ON |
Enables memory reception. | |
1. PASSWORD |
Registers the password that protects the authority for accessing to memory. | |
2. REPORT PRINT |
Sets whether to print a report on memory reception.
|
|
3. MEMORY RX TIME |
Sets whether to set a period for memory reception. | |
OFF |
Disables setting a period of memory reception. | |
ON |
Enables setting a period of memory reception.
|
|
7. FORWARD ERR. SET.*2 | Sets the machine to print and/or store received documents when document forwarding fails. | Checking/Changing the Status of Documents with Forwarding Errors (Fax) Checking/Changing the Status of Documents with Forwarding Errors (I-Fax) |
1. PRINT |
Sets whether to print out the image if forwarding fails.
|
|
2. STORE TO MEMORY |
Sets whether to store the image in memory if forwarding fails.
|
|
8. REMOTE UI*1 | Sets whether to activate the Remote UI function to operate the machine and change the settings from a network computer using a web browser.
|
Restricting the Remote UI |
9. ACCESS TO DEST.*2 | Sets restriction of the access to destinations. | Restricting Access to Destinations |
1. ADD. BOOK PASSWOR |
Sets a password to restrict editing the Address Book. (7 digits maximum) | Setting a Password for the Address Book |
2. RESTRICT NEW ADD. |
Sets whether to restrict registering or changing destinations for one-touch keys and coded dial codes*4. Sets whether to restrict making calls to the destinations not registered in Address Book.
*5 You can still make calls using an external phone if all of the ollowing conditions are met:
|
Restricting the New Address |
3. FAX DRIVER TX |
Sets whether to restrict sending faxes from a computer using the fax driver.
|
Restricting PC Faxing |
4. CONFIRM FAX NO. |
Sets whether to confirm the entered fax numbers each time you send a fax.
|
Confirming Entered Fax Numbers |
10.CHECKING THE LOG | Sets whether to allow displaying the log. | Checking the Job Log |
ON |
Enables confirmation of logs using [System Monitor]. | |
OFF |
Disables confirmation of logs using [System Monitor]. Activity Report will not be printed automatically. |
|
11.LICENSE REGISTRA. | Enter a license key using the numeric keys to activate the bar code printing function. | Registering a License |
12.USE DEVICE USB | Sets whether to restrict jobs through the USB interface.
|
Restricting the USB Interface Port |
*1 | Only for the imageRUNNER 1025N/1025iF. You can use the imageRUNNER 1025 in a network environment if the optional Network Board is installed. |
*2 | Only for the imageRUNNER 1025iF. |